Bv9ARM.ch06.html   [plain text]


<!--
 - Copyright (C) 2004-2008 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
 - Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
 - 
 - Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
 - purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
 - copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
 - 
 - THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
 - REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
 - AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
 - INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
 - LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
 - OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
 - PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
-->
<!-- $Id: Bv9ARM.ch06.html,v 1.201 2008/11/07 01:11:19 tbox Exp $ -->
<html>
<head>
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1">
<title>Chapter 6. BIND 9 Configuration Reference</title>
<meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.71.1">
<link rel="start" href="Bv9ARM.html" title="BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual">
<link rel="up" href="Bv9ARM.html" title="BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual">
<link rel="prev" href="Bv9ARM.ch05.html" title="Chapter 5. The BIND 9 Lightweight Resolver">
<link rel="next" href="Bv9ARM.ch07.html" title="Chapter 7. BIND 9 Security Considerations">
</head>
<body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF">
<div class="navheader">
<table width="100%" summary="Navigation header">
<tr><th colspan="3" align="center">Chapter 6. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 Configuration Reference</th></tr>
<tr>
<td width="20%" align="left">
<a accesskey="p" href="Bv9ARM.ch05.html">Prev</a> </td>
<th width="60%" align="center"> </th>
<td width="20%" align="right"> <a accesskey="n" href="Bv9ARM.ch07.html">Next</a>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
<hr>
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
<a name="Bv9ARM.ch06"></a>Chapter 6. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 Configuration Reference</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#configuration_file_elements">Configuration File Elements</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#address_match_lists">Address Match Lists</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2573721">Comment Syntax</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#Configuration_File_Grammar">Configuration File Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2574292"><span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#acl"><span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2574550"><span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#controls_statement_definition_and_usage"><span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2574910"><span><strong class="command">include</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2574928"><span><strong class="command">include</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2575088"><span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2575111"><span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2575202"><span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2575328"><span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2576640"><span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2576713"><span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2576777"><span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2576889"><span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2576904"><span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#options"><span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#statschannels"><span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2585469"><span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> Statement Definition and
            Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#server_statement_grammar"><span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#server_statement_definition_and_usage"><span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Definition and
            Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2586153"><span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2586204"><span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> Statement Definition
            and Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#view_statement_grammar"><span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2586423"><span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_statement_grammar"><span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
            Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2587892"><span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2590422">Zone File</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#types_of_resource_records_and_when_to_use_them">Types of Resource Records and When to Use Them</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2592652">Discussion of MX Records</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#Setting_TTLs">Setting TTLs</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2593204">Inverse Mapping in IPv4</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2593399">Other Zone File Directives</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2593656"><acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> Master File Extension: the  <span><strong class="command">$GENERATE</strong></span> Directive</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zonefile_format">Additional File Formats</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#statistics">BIND9 Statistics</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#statistics_counters">Statistics Counters</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
</dl>
</div>
<p>
      <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 configuration is broadly similar
      to <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8; however, there are a few new
      areas
      of configuration, such as views. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
      8 configuration files should work with few alterations in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
      9, although more complex configurations should be reviewed to check
      if they can be more efficiently implemented using the new features
      found in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
    </p>
<p>
      <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 4 configuration files can be
      converted to the new format
      using the shell script
      <code class="filename">contrib/named-bootconf/named-bootconf.sh</code>.
    </p>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
<a name="configuration_file_elements"></a>Configuration File Elements</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
        Following is a list of elements used throughout the <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> configuration
        file documentation:
      </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">acl_name</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  The name of an <code class="varname">address_match_list</code> as
                  defined by the <span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> statement.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">address_match_list</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  A list of one or more
                  <code class="varname">ip_addr</code>,
                  <code class="varname">ip_prefix</code>, <code class="varname">key_id</code>,
                  or <code class="varname">acl_name</code> elements, see
                  <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#address_match_lists" title="Address Match Lists">the section called &#8220;Address Match Lists&#8221;</a>.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">masters_list</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  A named list of one or more <code class="varname">ip_addr</code>
                  with optional <code class="varname">key_id</code> and/or
                  <code class="varname">ip_port</code>.
                  A <code class="varname">masters_list</code> may include other
                  <code class="varname">masters_lists</code>.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">domain_name</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  A quoted string which will be used as
                  a DNS name, for example "<code class="literal">my.test.domain</code>".
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">dotted_decimal</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  One to four integers valued 0 through
                  255 separated by dots (`.'), such as <span><strong class="command">123</strong></span>,
                  <span><strong class="command">45.67</strong></span> or <span><strong class="command">89.123.45.67</strong></span>.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">ip4_addr</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  An IPv4 address with exactly four elements
                  in <code class="varname">dotted_decimal</code> notation.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">ip6_addr</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  An IPv6 address, such as <span><strong class="command">2001:db8::1234</strong></span>.
                  IPv6 scoped addresses that have ambiguity on their
                  scope zones must be disambiguated by an appropriate
                  zone ID with the percent character (`%') as
                  delimiter.  It is strongly recommended to use
                  string zone names rather than numeric identifiers,
                  in order to be robust against system configuration
                  changes.  However, since there is no standard
                  mapping for such names and identifier values,
                  currently only interface names as link identifiers
                  are supported, assuming one-to-one mapping between
                  interfaces and links.  For example, a link-local
                  address <span><strong class="command">fe80::1</strong></span> on the link
                  attached to the interface <span><strong class="command">ne0</strong></span>
                  can be specified as <span><strong class="command">fe80::1%ne0</strong></span>.
                  Note that on most systems link-local addresses
                  always have the ambiguity, and need to be
                  disambiguated.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">ip_addr</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  An <code class="varname">ip4_addr</code> or <code class="varname">ip6_addr</code>.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">ip_port</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  An IP port <code class="varname">number</code>.
                  The <code class="varname">number</code> is limited to 0
                  through 65535, with values
                  below 1024 typically restricted to use by processes running
                  as root.
                  In some cases, an asterisk (`*') character can be used as a
                  placeholder to
                  select a random high-numbered port.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">ip_prefix</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  An IP network specified as an <code class="varname">ip_addr</code>,
                  followed by a slash (`/') and then the number of bits in the
                  netmask.
                  Trailing zeros in a <code class="varname">ip_addr</code>
                  may omitted.
                  For example, <span><strong class="command">127/8</strong></span> is the
                  network <span><strong class="command">127.0.0.0</strong></span> with
                  netmask <span><strong class="command">255.0.0.0</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">1.2.3.0/28</strong></span> is
                  network <span><strong class="command">1.2.3.0</strong></span> with netmask <span><strong class="command">255.255.255.240</strong></span>.
                </p>
                <p>
                  When specifying a prefix involving a IPv6 scoped address
                  the scope may be omitted.  In that case the prefix will
                  match packets from any scope.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">key_id</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  A <code class="varname">domain_name</code> representing
                  the name of a shared key, to be used for transaction
                  security.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">key_list</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  A list of one or more
                  <code class="varname">key_id</code>s,
                  separated by semicolons and ending with a semicolon.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">number</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  A non-negative 32-bit integer
                  (i.e., a number between 0 and 4294967295, inclusive).
                  Its acceptable value might further
                  be limited by the context in which it is used.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">path_name</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  A quoted string which will be used as
                  a pathname, such as <code class="filename">zones/master/my.test.domain</code>.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">port_list</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  A list of an <code class="varname">ip_port</code> or a port
                  range.
                  A port range is specified in the form of
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>range</code></strong> followed by
                  two <code class="varname">ip_port</code>s,
                  <code class="varname">port_low</code> and
                  <code class="varname">port_high</code>, which represents
                  port numbers from <code class="varname">port_low</code> through
                  <code class="varname">port_high</code>, inclusive.
                  <code class="varname">port_low</code> must not be larger than
                  <code class="varname">port_high</code>.
                  For example,
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>range 1024 65535</code></strong> represents
                  ports from 1024 through 65535.
                  In either case an asterisk (`*') character is not
                  allowed as a valid <code class="varname">ip_port</code>.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">size_spec</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  A number, the word <strong class="userinput"><code>unlimited</code></strong>,
                  or the word <strong class="userinput"><code>default</code></strong>.
                </p>
                <p>
                  An <code class="varname">unlimited</code> <code class="varname">size_spec</code> requests unlimited
                  use, or the maximum available amount. A <code class="varname">default size_spec</code> uses
                  the limit that was in force when the server was started.
                </p>
                <p>
                  A <code class="varname">number</code> can optionally be
                  followed by a scaling factor:
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>K</code></strong> or <strong class="userinput"><code>k</code></strong>
                  for kilobytes,
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>M</code></strong> or <strong class="userinput"><code>m</code></strong>
                  for megabytes, and
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>G</code></strong> or <strong class="userinput"><code>g</code></strong> for gigabytes,
                  which scale by 1024, 1024*1024, and 1024*1024*1024
                  respectively.
                </p>
                <p>
                  The value must be representable as a 64-bit unsigned integer
                  (0 to 18446744073709551615, inclusive).
                  Using <code class="varname">unlimited</code> is the best
                  way
                  to safely set a really large number.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">yes_or_no</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  Either <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong> or <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
                  The words <strong class="userinput"><code>true</code></strong> and <strong class="userinput"><code>false</code></strong> are
                  also accepted, as are the numbers <strong class="userinput"><code>1</code></strong>
                  and <strong class="userinput"><code>0</code></strong>.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p>
                  <code class="varname">dialup_option</code>
                </p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  One of <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>,
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>, <strong class="userinput"><code>notify</code></strong>,
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>notify-passive</code></strong>, <strong class="userinput"><code>refresh</code></strong> or
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>passive</code></strong>.
                  When used in a zone, <strong class="userinput"><code>notify-passive</code></strong>,
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>refresh</code></strong>, and <strong class="userinput"><code>passive</code></strong>
                  are restricted to slave and stub zones.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="address_match_lists"></a>Address Match Lists</h3></div></div></div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2573499"></a>Syntax</h4></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><code class="varname">address_match_list</code> = address_match_list_element ;
  [<span class="optional"> address_match_list_element; ... </span>]
<code class="varname">address_match_list_element</code> = [<span class="optional"> ! </span>] (ip_address [<span class="optional">/length</span>] |
   key key_id | acl_name | { address_match_list } )
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2573527"></a>Definition and Usage</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            Address match lists are primarily used to determine access
            control for various server operations. They are also used in
            the <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span>
            statements. The elements which constitute an address match
            list can be any of the following:
          </p>
<div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc">
<li>an IP address (IPv4 or IPv6)</li>
<li>an IP prefix (in `/' notation)</li>
<li>
                a key ID, as defined by the <span><strong class="command">key</strong></span>
                statement
              </li>
<li>the name of an address match list defined with
                the <span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> statement
              </li>
<li>a nested address match list enclosed in braces</li>
</ul></div>
<p>
            Elements can be negated with a leading exclamation mark (`!'),
            and the match list names "any", "none", "localhost", and
            "localnets" are predefined. More information on those names
            can be found in the description of the acl statement.
          </p>
<p>
            The addition of the key clause made the name of this syntactic
            element something of a misnomer, since security keys can be used
            to validate access without regard to a host or network address.
            Nonetheless, the term "address match list" is still used
            throughout the documentation.
          </p>
<p>
            When a given IP address or prefix is compared to an address
            match list, the comparison takes place in approximately O(1)
            time.  However, key comparisons require that the list of keys
            be traversed until a matching key is found, and therefore may
            be somewhat slower.
          </p>
<p>
            The interpretation of a match depends on whether the list is being
            used for access control, defining listen-on ports, or in a
            sortlist, and whether the element was negated.
          </p>
<p>
            When used as an access control list, a non-negated match
            allows access and a negated match denies access. If
            there is no match, access is denied. The clauses
            <span><strong class="command">allow-notify</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">allow-recursion</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">allow-recursion-on</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">allow-query-on</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache-on</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">allow-transfer</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">allow-update-forwarding</strong></span>, and
            <span><strong class="command">blackhole</strong></span> all use address match
            lists.  Similarly, the listen-on option will cause the
            server to refuse queries on any of the machine's
            addresses which do not match the list.
          </p>
<p>
            Order of insertion is significant.  If more than one element
            in an ACL is found to match a given IP address or prefix,
            preference will be given to the one that came
            <span class="emphasis"><em>first</em></span> in the ACL definition.
            Because of this first-match behavior, an element that
            defines a subset of another element in the list should
            come before the broader element, regardless of whether
            either is negated. For example, in
            <span><strong class="command">1.2.3/24; ! 1.2.3.13;</strong></span>
            the 1.2.3.13 element is completely useless because the
            algorithm will match any lookup for 1.2.3.13 to the 1.2.3/24
            element.  Using <span><strong class="command">! 1.2.3.13; 1.2.3/24</strong></span> fixes
            that problem by having 1.2.3.13 blocked by the negation, but
            all other 1.2.3.* hosts fall through.
          </p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2573721"></a>Comment Syntax</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
          The <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 comment syntax allows for
          comments to appear
          anywhere that whitespace may appear in a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> configuration
          file. To appeal to programmers of all kinds, they can be written
          in the C, C++, or shell/perl style.
        </p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2573736"></a>Syntax</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            </p>
<pre class="programlisting">/* This is a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> comment as in C */</pre>
<p>
            </p>
<pre class="programlisting">// This is a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> comment as in C++</pre>
<p>
            </p>
<pre class="programlisting"># This is a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> comment as in common UNIX shells and perl</pre>
<p>
          </p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2573766"></a>Definition and Usage</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            Comments may appear anywhere that whitespace may appear in
            a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> configuration file.
          </p>
<p>
            C-style comments start with the two characters /* (slash,
            star) and end with */ (star, slash). Because they are completely
            delimited with these characters, they can be used to comment only
            a portion of a line or to span multiple lines.
          </p>
<p>
            C-style comments cannot be nested. For example, the following
            is not valid because the entire comment ends with the first */:
          </p>
<p>

</p>
<pre class="programlisting">/* This is the start of a comment.
   This is still part of the comment.
/* This is an incorrect attempt at nesting a comment. */
   This is no longer in any comment. */
</pre>
<p>

          </p>
<p>
            C++-style comments start with the two characters // (slash,
            slash) and continue to the end of the physical line. They cannot
            be continued across multiple physical lines; to have one logical
            comment span multiple lines, each line must use the // pair.
          </p>
<p>
            For example:
          </p>
<p>

</p>
<pre class="programlisting">// This is the start of a comment.  The next line
// is a new comment, even though it is logically
// part of the previous comment.
</pre>
<p>

          </p>
<p>
            Shell-style (or perl-style, if you prefer) comments start
            with the character <code class="literal">#</code> (number sign)
            and continue to the end of the
            physical line, as in C++ comments.
          </p>
<p>
            For example:
          </p>
<p>

</p>
<pre class="programlisting"># This is the start of a comment.  The next line
# is a new comment, even though it is logically
# part of the previous comment.
</pre>
<p>

          </p>
<div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Warning</h3>
<p>
              You cannot use the semicolon (`;') character
              to start a comment such as you would in a zone file. The
              semicolon indicates the end of a configuration
              statement.
            </p>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
<a name="Configuration_File_Grammar"></a>Configuration File Grammar</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
        A <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 configuration consists of
        statements and comments.
        Statements end with a semicolon. Statements and comments are the
        only elements that can appear without enclosing braces. Many
        statements contain a block of sub-statements, which are also
        terminated with a semicolon.
      </p>
<p>
        The following statements are supported:
      </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                <p><span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span></p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  defines a named IP address
                  matching list, for access control and other uses.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p><span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span></p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  declares control channels to be used
                  by the <span><strong class="command">rndc</strong></span> utility.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p><span><strong class="command">include</strong></span></p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  includes a file.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p><span><strong class="command">key</strong></span></p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  specifies key information for use in
                  authentication and authorization using TSIG.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p><span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span></p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  specifies what the server logs, and where
                  the log messages are sent.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p><span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span></p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  configures <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> to
                  also act as a light-weight resolver daemon (<span><strong class="command">lwresd</strong></span>).
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p><span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span></p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  defines a named masters list for
                  inclusion in stub and slave zone masters clauses.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p><span><strong class="command">options</strong></span></p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  controls global server configuration
                  options and sets defaults for other statements.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p><span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span></p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  declares communication channels to get access to
                  <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> statistics.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p><span><strong class="command">server</strong></span></p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  sets certain configuration options on
                  a per-server basis.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p><span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span></p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  defines trusted DNSSEC keys.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p><span><strong class="command">view</strong></span></p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  defines a view.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                <p><span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span></p>
              </td>
<td>
                <p>
                  defines a zone.
                </p>
              </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
        The <span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> and
        <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statements may only occur once
        per
        configuration.
      </p>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2574292"></a><span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> acl-name {
    address_match_list
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="acl"></a><span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
          The <span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> statement assigns a symbolic
          name to an address match list. It gets its name from a primary
          use of address match lists: Access Control Lists (ACLs).
        </p>
<p>
          Note that an address match list's name must be defined
          with <span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> before it can be used
          elsewhere; no forward references are allowed.
        </p>
<p>
          The following ACLs are built-in:
        </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                  <p><span><strong class="command">any</strong></span></p>
                </td>
<td>
                  <p>
                    Matches all hosts.
                  </p>
                </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                  <p><span><strong class="command">none</strong></span></p>
                </td>
<td>
                  <p>
                    Matches no hosts.
                  </p>
                </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                  <p><span><strong class="command">localhost</strong></span></p>
                </td>
<td>
                  <p>
                    Matches the IPv4 and IPv6 addresses of all network
                    interfaces on the system.
                  </p>
                </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                  <p><span><strong class="command">localnets</strong></span></p>
                </td>
<td>
                  <p>
                    Matches any host on an IPv4 or IPv6 network
                    for which the system has an interface.
                    Some systems do not provide a way to determine the prefix
                    lengths of
                    local IPv6 addresses.
                    In such a case, <span><strong class="command">localnets</strong></span>
                    only matches the local
                    IPv6 addresses, just like <span><strong class="command">localhost</strong></span>.
                  </p>
                </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2574550"></a><span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> {
   [ inet ( ip_addr | * ) [ port ip_port ] allow { <em class="replaceable"><code> address_match_list </code></em> }
                keys { <em class="replaceable"><code>key_list</code></em> }; ]
   [ inet ...; ]
   [ unix <em class="replaceable"><code>path</code></em> perm <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> owner <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> group <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> keys { <em class="replaceable"><code>key_list</code></em> }; ]
   [ unix ...; ]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="controls_statement_definition_and_usage"></a><span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
          The <span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> statement declares control
          channels to be used by system administrators to control the
          operation of the name server. These control channels are
          used by the <span><strong class="command">rndc</strong></span> utility to send
          commands to and retrieve non-DNS results from a name server.
        </p>
<p>
          An <span><strong class="command">inet</strong></span> control channel is a TCP socket
          listening at the specified <span><strong class="command">ip_port</strong></span> on the
          specified <span><strong class="command">ip_addr</strong></span>, which can be an IPv4 or IPv6
          address.  An <span><strong class="command">ip_addr</strong></span> of <code class="literal">*</code> (asterisk) is
          interpreted as the IPv4 wildcard address; connections will be
          accepted on any of the system's IPv4 addresses.
          To listen on the IPv6 wildcard address,
          use an <span><strong class="command">ip_addr</strong></span> of <code class="literal">::</code>.
          If you will only use <span><strong class="command">rndc</strong></span> on the local host,
          using the loopback address (<code class="literal">127.0.0.1</code>
          or <code class="literal">::1</code>) is recommended for maximum security.
        </p>
<p>
          If no port is specified, port 953 is used. The asterisk
          "<code class="literal">*</code>" cannot be used for <span><strong class="command">ip_port</strong></span>.
        </p>
<p>
          The ability to issue commands over the control channel is
          restricted by the <span><strong class="command">allow</strong></span> and
          <span><strong class="command">keys</strong></span> clauses.
          Connections to the control channel are permitted based on the
          <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span>.  This is for simple
          IP address based filtering only; any <span><strong class="command">key_id</strong></span>
          elements of the <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span>
          are ignored.
        </p>
<p>
          A <span><strong class="command">unix</strong></span> control channel is a UNIX domain
          socket listening at the specified path in the file system.
          Access to the socket is specified by the <span><strong class="command">perm</strong></span>,
          <span><strong class="command">owner</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">group</strong></span> clauses.
          Note on some platforms (SunOS and Solaris) the permissions
          (<span><strong class="command">perm</strong></span>) are applied to the parent directory
          as the permissions on the socket itself are ignored.
        </p>
<p>
          The primary authorization mechanism of the command
          channel is the <span><strong class="command">key_list</strong></span>, which
          contains a list of <span><strong class="command">key_id</strong></span>s.
          Each <span><strong class="command">key_id</strong></span> in the <span><strong class="command">key_list</strong></span>
          is authorized to execute commands over the control channel.
          See <a href="Bv9ARM.ch03.html#rndc">Remote Name Daemon Control application</a> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch03.html#admin_tools" title="Administrative Tools">the section called &#8220;Administrative Tools&#8221;</a>)
          for information about configuring keys in <span><strong class="command">rndc</strong></span>.
        </p>
<p>
          If no <span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> statement is present,
          <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will set up a default
          control channel listening on the loopback address 127.0.0.1
          and its IPv6 counterpart ::1.
          In this case, and also when the <span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> statement
          is present but does not have a <span><strong class="command">keys</strong></span> clause,
          <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will attempt to load the command channel key
          from the file <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> in
          <code class="filename">/etc</code> (or whatever <code class="varname">sysconfdir</code>
          was specified as when <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> was built).
          To create a <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> file, run
          <strong class="userinput"><code>rndc-confgen -a</code></strong>.
        </p>
<p>
          The <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> feature was created to
          ease the transition of systems from <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8,
          which did not have digital signatures on its command channel
          messages and thus did not have a <span><strong class="command">keys</strong></span> clause.

          It makes it possible to use an existing <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8
          configuration file in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 unchanged,
          and still have <span><strong class="command">rndc</strong></span> work the same way
          <span><strong class="command">ndc</strong></span> worked in BIND 8, simply by executing the
          command <strong class="userinput"><code>rndc-confgen -a</code></strong> after BIND 9 is
          installed.
        </p>
<p>
          Since the <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> feature
          is only intended to allow the backward-compatible usage of
          <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 configuration files, this
          feature does not
          have a high degree of configurability.  You cannot easily change
          the key name or the size of the secret, so you should make a
          <code class="filename">rndc.conf</code> with your own key if you
          wish to change
          those things.  The <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> file
          also has its
          permissions set such that only the owner of the file (the user that
          <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> is running as) can access it.
          If you
          desire greater flexibility in allowing other users to access
          <span><strong class="command">rndc</strong></span> commands, then you need to create
          a
          <code class="filename">rndc.conf</code> file and make it group
          readable by a group
          that contains the users who should have access.
        </p>
<p>
          To disable the command channel, use an empty
          <span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> statement:
          <span><strong class="command">controls { };</strong></span>.
        </p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2574910"></a><span><strong class="command">include</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">include</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em>;</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2574928"></a><span><strong class="command">include</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
          The <span><strong class="command">include</strong></span> statement inserts the
          specified file at the point where the <span><strong class="command">include</strong></span>
          statement is encountered. The <span><strong class="command">include</strong></span>
                statement facilitates the administration of configuration
          files
          by permitting the reading or writing of some things but not
          others. For example, the statement could include private keys
          that are readable only by the name server.
        </p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2575088"></a><span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>key_id</code></em> {
    algorithm <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em>;
    secret <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em>;
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2575111"></a><span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
          The <span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> statement defines a shared
          secret key for use with TSIG (see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#tsig" title="TSIG">the section called &#8220;TSIG&#8221;</a>)
          or the command channel
          (see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#controls_statement_definition_and_usage" title="controls Statement Definition and
          Usage">the section called &#8220;<span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage&#8221;</a>).
        </p>
<p>
          The <span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> statement can occur at the
          top level
          of the configuration file or inside a <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>
          statement.  Keys defined in top-level <span><strong class="command">key</strong></span>
          statements can be used in all views.  Keys intended for use in
          a <span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> statement
          (see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#controls_statement_definition_and_usage" title="controls Statement Definition and
          Usage">the section called &#8220;<span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage&#8221;</a>)
          must be defined at the top level.
        </p>
<p>
          The <em class="replaceable"><code>key_id</code></em>, also known as the
          key name, is a domain name uniquely identifying the key. It can
          be used in a <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span>
          statement to cause requests sent to that
          server to be signed with this key, or in address match lists to
          verify that incoming requests have been signed with a key
          matching this name, algorithm, and secret.
        </p>
<p>
          The <em class="replaceable"><code>algorithm_id</code></em> is a string
          that specifies a security/authentication algorithm.  Named
          supports <code class="literal">hmac-md5</code>,
          <code class="literal">hmac-sha1</code>, <code class="literal">hmac-sha224</code>,
          <code class="literal">hmac-sha256</code>, <code class="literal">hmac-sha384</code>
          and <code class="literal">hmac-sha512</code> TSIG authentication.
          Truncated hashes are supported by appending the minimum
          number of required bits preceded by a dash, e.g.
          <code class="literal">hmac-sha1-80</code>.  The
          <em class="replaceable"><code>secret_string</code></em> is the secret
          to be used by the algorithm, and is treated as a base-64
          encoded string.
        </p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2575202"></a><span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> {
   [ <span><strong class="command">channel</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>channel_name</code></em> {
     ( <span><strong class="command">file</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>
         [ <span><strong class="command">versions</strong></span> ( <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> | <span><strong class="command">unlimited</strong></span> ) ]
         [ <span><strong class="command">size</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>size spec</code></em> ]
       | <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>syslog_facility</code></em>
       | <span><strong class="command">stderr</strong></span>
       | <span><strong class="command">null</strong></span> );
     [ <span><strong class="command">severity</strong></span> (<code class="option">critical</code> | <code class="option">error</code> | <code class="option">warning</code> | <code class="option">notice</code> |
                 <code class="option">info</code> | <code class="option">debug</code> [ <em class="replaceable"><code>level</code></em> ] | <code class="option">dynamic</code> ); ]
     [ <span><strong class="command">print-category</strong></span> <code class="option">yes</code> or <code class="option">no</code>; ]
     [ <span><strong class="command">print-severity</strong></span> <code class="option">yes</code> or <code class="option">no</code>; ]
     [ <span><strong class="command">print-time</strong></span> <code class="option">yes</code> or <code class="option">no</code>; ]
   }; ]
   [ <span><strong class="command">category</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>category_name</code></em> {
     <em class="replaceable"><code>channel_name</code></em> ; [ <em class="replaceable"><code>channel_name</code></em> ; ... ]
   }; ]
   ...
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2575328"></a><span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
          The <span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> statement configures a
          wide
          variety of logging options for the name server. Its <span><strong class="command">channel</strong></span> phrase
          associates output methods, format options and severity levels with
          a name that can then be used with the <span><strong class="command">category</strong></span> phrase
          to select how various classes of messages are logged.
        </p>
<p>
          Only one <span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> statement is used to
          define
          as many channels and categories as are wanted. If there is no <span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> statement,
          the logging configuration will be:
        </p>
<pre class="programlisting">logging {
     category default { default_syslog; default_debug; };
     category unmatched { null; };
};
</pre>
<p>
          In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9, the logging configuration
          is only established when
          the entire configuration file has been parsed.  In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8, it was
          established as soon as the <span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span>
          statement
          was parsed. When the server is starting up, all logging messages
          regarding syntax errors in the configuration file go to the default
          channels, or to standard error if the "<code class="option">-g</code>" option
          was specified.
        </p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2575380"></a>The <span><strong class="command">channel</strong></span> Phrase</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            All log output goes to one or more <span class="emphasis"><em>channels</em></span>;
            you can make as many of them as you want.
          </p>
<p>
            Every channel definition must include a destination clause that
            says whether messages selected for the channel go to a file, to a
            particular syslog facility, to the standard error stream, or are
            discarded. It can optionally also limit the message severity level
            that will be accepted by the channel (the default is
            <span><strong class="command">info</strong></span>), and whether to include a
            <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>-generated time stamp, the
            category name
            and/or severity level (the default is not to include any).
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">null</strong></span> destination clause
            causes all messages sent to the channel to be discarded;
            in that case, other options for the channel are meaningless.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">file</strong></span> destination clause directs
            the channel
            to a disk file.  It can include limitations
            both on how large the file is allowed to become, and how many
            versions
            of the file will be saved each time the file is opened.
          </p>
<p>
            If you use the <span><strong class="command">versions</strong></span> log file
            option, then
            <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will retain that many backup
            versions of the file by
            renaming them when opening.  For example, if you choose to keep
            three old versions
            of the file <code class="filename">lamers.log</code>, then just
            before it is opened
            <code class="filename">lamers.log.1</code> is renamed to
            <code class="filename">lamers.log.2</code>, <code class="filename">lamers.log.0</code> is renamed
            to <code class="filename">lamers.log.1</code>, and <code class="filename">lamers.log</code> is
            renamed to <code class="filename">lamers.log.0</code>.
            You can say <span><strong class="command">versions unlimited</strong></span> to
            not limit
            the number of versions.
            If a <span><strong class="command">size</strong></span> option is associated with
            the log file,
            then renaming is only done when the file being opened exceeds the
            indicated size.  No backup versions are kept by default; any
            existing
            log file is simply appended.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">size</strong></span> option for files is used
            to limit log
            growth. If the file ever exceeds the size, then <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will
            stop writing to the file unless it has a <span><strong class="command">versions</strong></span> option
            associated with it.  If backup versions are kept, the files are
            rolled as
            described above and a new one begun.  If there is no
            <span><strong class="command">versions</strong></span> option, no more data will
            be written to the log
            until some out-of-band mechanism removes or truncates the log to
            less than the
            maximum size.  The default behavior is not to limit the size of
            the
            file.
          </p>
<p>
            Example usage of the <span><strong class="command">size</strong></span> and
            <span><strong class="command">versions</strong></span> options:
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">channel an_example_channel {
    file "example.log" versions 3 size 20m;
    print-time yes;
    print-category yes;
};
</pre>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> destination clause
            directs the
            channel to the system log.  Its argument is a
            syslog facility as described in the <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> man
            page. Known facilities are <span><strong class="command">kern</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">user</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">mail</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">daemon</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">auth</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">lpr</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">news</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">uucp</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">cron</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">authpriv</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">ftp</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">local0</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">local1</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">local2</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">local3</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">local4</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">local5</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">local6</strong></span> and
            <span><strong class="command">local7</strong></span>, however not all facilities
            are supported on
            all operating systems.
            How <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> will handle messages
            sent to
            this facility is described in the <span><strong class="command">syslog.conf</strong></span> man
            page. If you have a system which uses a very old version of <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> that
            only uses two arguments to the <span><strong class="command">openlog()</strong></span> function,
            then this clause is silently ignored.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">severity</strong></span> clause works like <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span>'s
            "priorities", except that they can also be used if you are writing
            straight to a file rather than using <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span>.
            Messages which are not at least of the severity level given will
            not be selected for the channel; messages of higher severity
            levels
            will be accepted.
          </p>
<p>
            If you are using <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span>, then the <span><strong class="command">syslog.conf</strong></span> priorities
            will also determine what eventually passes through. For example,
            defining a channel facility and severity as <span><strong class="command">daemon</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">debug</strong></span> but
            only logging <span><strong class="command">daemon.warning</strong></span> via <span><strong class="command">syslog.conf</strong></span> will
            cause messages of severity <span><strong class="command">info</strong></span> and
            <span><strong class="command">notice</strong></span> to
            be dropped. If the situation were reversed, with <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> writing
            messages of only <span><strong class="command">warning</strong></span> or higher,
            then <span><strong class="command">syslogd</strong></span> would
            print all messages it received from the channel.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">stderr</strong></span> destination clause
            directs the
            channel to the server's standard error stream.  This is intended
            for
            use when the server is running as a foreground process, for
            example
            when debugging a configuration.
          </p>
<p>
            The server can supply extensive debugging information when
            it is in debugging mode. If the server's global debug level is
            greater
            than zero, then debugging mode will be active. The global debug
            level is set either by starting the <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> server
            with the <code class="option">-d</code> flag followed by a positive integer,
            or by running <span><strong class="command">rndc trace</strong></span>.
            The global debug level
            can be set to zero, and debugging mode turned off, by running <span><strong class="command">rndc
notrace</strong></span>. All debugging messages in the server have a debug
            level, and higher debug levels give more detailed output. Channels
            that specify a specific debug severity, for example:
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">channel specific_debug_level {
    file "foo";
    severity debug 3;
};
</pre>
<p>
            will get debugging output of level 3 or less any time the
            server is in debugging mode, regardless of the global debugging
            level. Channels with <span><strong class="command">dynamic</strong></span>
            severity use the
            server's global debug level to determine what messages to print.
          </p>
<p>
            If <span><strong class="command">print-time</strong></span> has been turned on,
            then
            the date and time will be logged. <span><strong class="command">print-time</strong></span> may
            be specified for a <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> channel,
            but is usually
            pointless since <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> also prints
            the date and
            time. If <span><strong class="command">print-category</strong></span> is
            requested, then the
            category of the message will be logged as well. Finally, if <span><strong class="command">print-severity</strong></span> is
            on, then the severity level of the message will be logged. The <span><strong class="command">print-</strong></span> options may
            be used in any combination, and will always be printed in the
            following
            order: time, category, severity. Here is an example where all
            three <span><strong class="command">print-</strong></span> options
            are on:
          </p>
<p>
            <code class="computeroutput">28-Feb-2000 15:05:32.863 general: notice: running</code>
          </p>
<p>
            There are four predefined channels that are used for
            <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>'s default logging as follows.
            How they are
            used is described in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#the_category_phrase" title="The category Phrase">the section called &#8220;The <span><strong class="command">category</strong></span> Phrase&#8221;</a>.
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">channel default_syslog {
    syslog daemon;                      // send to syslog's daemon
                                        // facility
    severity info;                      // only send priority info
                                        // and higher
};

channel default_debug {
    file "named.run";                   // write to named.run in
                                        // the working directory
                                        // Note: stderr is used instead
                                        // of "named.run"
                                        // if the server is started
                                        // with the '-f' option.
    severity dynamic;                   // log at the server's
                                        // current debug level
};

channel default_stderr {
    stderr;                             // writes to stderr
    severity info;                      // only send priority info
                                        // and higher
};

channel null {
   null;                                // toss anything sent to
                                        // this channel
};
</pre>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">default_debug</strong></span> channel has the
            special
            property that it only produces output when the server's debug
            level is
            nonzero.  It normally writes to a file called <code class="filename">named.run</code>
            in the server's working directory.
          </p>
<p>
            For security reasons, when the "<code class="option">-u</code>"
            command line option is used, the <code class="filename">named.run</code> file
            is created only after <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> has
            changed to the
            new UID, and any debug output generated while <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> is
            starting up and still running as root is discarded.  If you need
            to capture this output, you must run the server with the "<code class="option">-g</code>"
            option and redirect standard error to a file.
          </p>
<p>
            Once a channel is defined, it cannot be redefined. Thus you
            cannot alter the built-in channels directly, but you can modify
            the default logging by pointing categories at channels you have
            defined.
          </p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="the_category_phrase"></a>The <span><strong class="command">category</strong></span> Phrase</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            There are many categories, so you can send the logs you want
            to see wherever you want, without seeing logs you don't want. If
            you don't specify a list of channels for a category, then log
            messages
            in that category will be sent to the <span><strong class="command">default</strong></span> category
            instead. If you don't specify a default category, the following
            "default default" is used:
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">category default { default_syslog; default_debug; };
</pre>
<p>
            As an example, let's say you want to log security events to
            a file, but you also want keep the default logging behavior. You'd
            specify the following:
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">channel my_security_channel {
    file "my_security_file";
    severity info;
};
category security {
    my_security_channel;
    default_syslog;
    default_debug;
};</pre>
<p>
            To discard all messages in a category, specify the <span><strong class="command">null</strong></span> channel:
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">category xfer-out { null; };
category notify { null; };
</pre>
<p>
            Following are the available categories and brief descriptions
            of the types of log information they contain. More
            categories may be added in future <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> releases.
          </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">default</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      The default category defines the logging
                      options for those categories where no specific
                      configuration has been
                      defined.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">general</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      The catch-all. Many things still aren't
                      classified into categories, and they all end up here.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">database</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Messages relating to the databases used
                      internally by the name server to store zone and cache
                      data.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">security</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Approval and denial of requests.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">config</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Configuration file parsing and processing.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">resolver</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      DNS resolution, such as the recursive
                      lookups performed on behalf of clients by a caching name
                      server.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">xfer-in</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Zone transfers the server is receiving.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">xfer-out</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Zone transfers the server is sending.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      The NOTIFY protocol.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">client</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Processing of client requests.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">unmatched</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Messages that named was unable to determine the
                      class of or for which there was no matching <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>.
                      A one line summary is also logged to the <span><strong class="command">client</strong></span> category.
                      This category is best sent to a file or stderr, by
                      default it is sent to
                      the <span><strong class="command">null</strong></span> channel.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">network</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Network operations.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">update</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Dynamic updates.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">update-security</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Approval and denial of update requests.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">queries</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Specify where queries should be logged to.
                    </p>
                    <p>
                      At startup, specifying the category <span><strong class="command">queries</strong></span> will also
                      enable query logging unless <span><strong class="command">querylog</strong></span> option has been
                      specified.
                    </p>

                    <p>
                      The query log entry reports the client's IP
                      address and port number, and the query name,
                      class and type.  It also reports whether the
                      Recursion Desired flag was set (+ if set, -
                      if not set), if the query was signed (S),
                      EDNS was in use (E), if DO (DNSSEC Ok) was
                      set (D), or if CD (Checking Disabled) was set
                      (C).
                    </p>

                    <p>
                      <code class="computeroutput">client 127.0.0.1#62536: query: www.example.com IN AAAA +SE</code>
                    </p>
                    <p>
                      <code class="computeroutput">client ::1#62537: query: www.example.net IN AAAA -SE</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">dispatch</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Dispatching of incoming packets to the
                      server modules where they are to be processed.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">dnssec</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      DNSSEC and TSIG protocol processing.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">lame-servers</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Lame servers.  These are misconfigurations
                      in remote servers, discovered by BIND 9 when trying to
                      query
                      those servers during resolution.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">delegation-only</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Delegation only.  Logs queries that have
                      been forced to NXDOMAIN as the result of a
                      delegation-only zone or
                      a <span><strong class="command">delegation-only</strong></span> in a
                      hint or stub zone declaration.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">edns-disabled</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Log queries that have been forced to use plain
                      DNS due to timeouts.  This is often due to
                      the remote servers not being RFC 1034 compliant
                      (not always returning FORMERR or similar to
                      EDNS queries and other extensions to the DNS
                      when they are not understood).  In other words, this is
                      targeted at servers that fail to respond to
                      DNS queries that they don't understand.
                    </p>
                    <p>
                      Note: the log message can also be due to
                      packet loss.  Before reporting servers for
                      non-RFC 1034 compliance they should be re-tested
                      to determine the nature of the non-compliance.
                      This testing should prevent or reduce the
                      number of false-positive reports.
                    </p>
                    <p>
                      Note: eventually named will have to stop
                      treating such timeouts as due to RFC 1034 non
                      compliance and start treating it as plain
                      packet loss.  Falsely classifying packet
                      loss as due to RFC 1034 non compliance impacts
                      on DNSSEC validation which requires EDNS for
                      the DNSSEC records to be returned.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2576640"></a><span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
           This is the grammar of the <span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span>
          statement in the <code class="filename">named.conf</code> file:
        </p>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> {
    [<span class="optional"> listen-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> view <em class="replaceable"><code>view_name</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> search { <em class="replaceable"><code>domain_name</code></em> ; [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>domain_name</code></em> ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> ndots <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2576713"></a><span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
          The <span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> statement configures the
          name
          server to also act as a lightweight resolver server. (See
          <a href="Bv9ARM.ch05.html#lwresd" title="Running a Resolver Daemon">the section called &#8220;Running a Resolver Daemon&#8221;</a>.)  There may be multiple
          <span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> statements configuring
          lightweight resolver servers with different properties.
        </p>
<p>
          The <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> statement specifies a
          list of
          addresses (and ports) that this instance of a lightweight resolver
          daemon
          should accept requests on.  If no port is specified, port 921 is
          used.
          If this statement is omitted, requests will be accepted on
          127.0.0.1,
          port 921.
        </p>
<p>
          The <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statement binds this
          instance of a
          lightweight resolver daemon to a view in the DNS namespace, so that
          the
          response will be constructed in the same manner as a normal DNS
          query
          matching this view.  If this statement is omitted, the default view
          is
          used, and if there is no default view, an error is triggered.
        </p>
<p>
          The <span><strong class="command">search</strong></span> statement is equivalent to
          the
          <span><strong class="command">search</strong></span> statement in
          <code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code>.  It provides a
          list of domains
          which are appended to relative names in queries.
        </p>
<p>
          The <span><strong class="command">ndots</strong></span> statement is equivalent to
          the
          <span><strong class="command">ndots</strong></span> statement in
          <code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code>.  It indicates the
          minimum
          number of dots in a relative domain name that should result in an
          exact match lookup before search path elements are appended.
        </p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2576777"></a><span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting">
<span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] { ( <em class="replaceable"><code>masters_list</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] [<span class="optional">key <em class="replaceable"><code>key</code></em></span>] ) ; [<span class="optional">...</span>] };
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2576889"></a><span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p><span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span>
          lists allow for a common set of masters to be easily used by
          multiple stub and slave zones.
        </p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2576904"></a><span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
          This is the grammar of the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span>
          statement in the <code class="filename">named.conf</code> file:
        </p>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> {
    [<span class="optional"> version <em class="replaceable"><code>version_string</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> hostname <em class="replaceable"><code>hostname_string</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> server-id <em class="replaceable"><code>server_id_string</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> directory <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> key-directory <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> named-xfer <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> tkey-gssapi-credential <em class="replaceable"><code>principal</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> tkey-domain <em class="replaceable"><code>domainname</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> tkey-dhkey <em class="replaceable"><code>key_name</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>key_tag</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> cache-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> dump-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> memstatistics <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> memstatistics-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> pid-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> recursing-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> statistics-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> zone-statistics <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> auth-nxdomain <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> deallocate-on-exit <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> dialup <em class="replaceable"><code>dialup_option</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> fake-iquery <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> fetch-glue <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> flush-zones-on-shutdown <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> has-old-clients <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> host-statistics <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> host-statistics-max <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> minimal-responses <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> multiple-cnames <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>explicit</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>master-only</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> recursion <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> rfc2308-type1 <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> use-id-pool <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> maintain-ixfr-base <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> ixfr-from-differences (<em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> | <code class="constant">master</code> | <code class="constant">slave</code>); </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> dnssec-enable <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> dnssec-validation <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> dnssec-lookaside <em class="replaceable"><code>domain</code></em> trust-anchor <em class="replaceable"><code>domain</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> dnssec-must-be-secure <em class="replaceable"><code>domain yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> dnssec-accept-expired <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> forward ( <em class="replaceable"><code>only</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>first</code></em> ); </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> forwarders { [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> dual-stack-servers [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] {
        ( <em class="replaceable"><code>domain_name</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] |
          <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ) ; 
        ... }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-names ( <em class="replaceable"><code>master</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>slave</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>response</code></em> )
        ( <em class="replaceable"><code>warn</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>fail</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ignore</code></em> ); </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-mx ( <em class="replaceable"><code>warn</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>fail</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ignore</code></em> ); </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-wildcard <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-integrity <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-mx-cname ( <em class="replaceable"><code>warn</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>fail</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ignore</code></em> ); </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-srv-cname ( <em class="replaceable"><code>warn</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>fail</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ignore</code></em> ); </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-sibling <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-notify { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-query { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-query-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-query-cache { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-query-cache-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-transfer { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-recursion { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-recursion-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-update { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-update-forwarding { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> update-check-ksk <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> try-tcp-refresh <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-v6-synthesis { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> blackhole { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> use-v4-udp-ports { <em class="replaceable"><code>port_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> avoid-v4-udp-ports { <em class="replaceable"><code>port_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> use-v6-udp-ports { <em class="replaceable"><code>port_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> avoid-v6-udp-ports { <em class="replaceable"><code>port_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> listen-on [<span class="optional"> port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> </span>] { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> listen-on-v6 [<span class="optional"> port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> </span>] { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> query-source ( ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> )
        [<span class="optional"> port ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>] |
        [<span class="optional"> address ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>]
        [<span class="optional"> port ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>] ) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> query-source-v6 ( ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> )
        [<span class="optional"> port ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>] | 
        [<span class="optional"> address ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>] 
        [<span class="optional"> port ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>] ) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> use-queryport-pool <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> queryport-pool-ports <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> queryport-pool-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-transfer-time-in <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-transfer-time-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-transfer-idle-in <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-transfer-idle-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> tcp-clients <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> reserved-sockets <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> recursive-clients <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> serial-query-rate <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> serial-queries <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> tcp-listen-queue <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfer-format <em class="replaceable"><code>( one-answer | many-answers )</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfers-in  <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfers-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfers-per-ns <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> alt-transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> alt-transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> use-alt-transfer-source <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-delay <em class="replaceable"><code>seconds</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-to-soa <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> also-notify { <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-ixfr-log-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-journal-size <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> coresize <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> datasize <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> files <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> stacksize <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> cleaning-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> heartbeat-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> interface-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> statistics-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> topology { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }</span>];
    [<span class="optional"> sortlist { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }</span>];
    [<span class="optional"> rrset-order { <em class="replaceable"><code>order_spec</code></em> ; [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>order_spec</code></em> ; ... </span>] </span>] };
    [<span class="optional"> lame-ttl <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-ncache-ttl <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-cache-ttl <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> sig-validity-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> sig-signing-nodes <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> sig-signing-signatures <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> sig-signing-type <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> min-roots <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> use-ixfr <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> provide-ixfr <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> request-ixfr <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> treat-cr-as-space <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> min-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> min-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> additional-from-auth <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> additional-from-cache <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> random-device <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-cache-size <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> match-mapped-addresses <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> preferred-glue ( <em class="replaceable"><code>A</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>AAAA</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>NONE</code></em> ); </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> edns-udp-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-udp-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> root-delegation-only [<span class="optional"> exclude { <em class="replaceable"><code>namelist</code></em> } </span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> querylog <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> disable-algorithms <em class="replaceable"><code>domain</code></em> { <em class="replaceable"><code>algorithm</code></em>; [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>algorithm</code></em>; </span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> acache-enable <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> acache-cleaning-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-acache-size <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> clients-per-query <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-clients-per-query <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> masterfile-format (<code class="constant">text</code>|<code class="constant">raw</code>) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> empty-server <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> empty-contact <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> empty-zones-enable <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> disable-empty-zone <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> zero-no-soa-ttl <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> zero-no-soa-ttl-cache <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="options"></a><span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
          The <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statement sets up global
          options
          to be used by <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>. This statement
          may appear only
          once in a configuration file. If there is no <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span>
          statement, an options block with each option set to its default will
          be used.
        </p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">directory</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                The working directory of the server.
                Any non-absolute pathnames in the configuration file will be
                taken
                as relative to this directory. The default location for most
                server
                output files (e.g. <code class="filename">named.run</code>)
                is this directory.
                If a directory is not specified, the working directory
                defaults to `<code class="filename">.</code>', the directory from
                which the server
                was started. The directory specified should be an absolute
                path.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">key-directory</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                When performing dynamic update of secure zones, the
                directory where the public and private key files should be
                found,
                if different than the current working directory.  The
                directory specified
                must be an absolute path.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">named-xfer</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                <span class="emphasis"><em>This option is obsolete.</em></span> It
                was used in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 to specify
                the pathname to the <span><strong class="command">named-xfer</strong></span>
                program.  In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9, no separate
                <span><strong class="command">named-xfer</strong></span> program is needed;
                its functionality is built into the name server.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">tkey-gssapi-credential</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                The security credential with which the server should
                authenticate keys requested by the GSS-TSIG protocol.
                Currently only Kerberos 5 authentication is available
                and the credential is a Kerberos principal which
                the server can acquire through the default system
                key file, normally <code class="filename">/etc/krb5.keytab</code>.
                Normally this principal is of the form
                "<strong class="userinput"><code>dns/</code></strong><code class="varname">server.domain</code>".
                To use GSS-TSIG, <span><strong class="command">tkey-domain</strong></span>
                must also be set.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">tkey-domain</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                The domain appended to the names of all shared keys
                generated with <span><strong class="command">TKEY</strong></span>.  When a
                client requests a <span><strong class="command">TKEY</strong></span> exchange,
                it may or may not specify the desired name for the
                key. If present, the name of the shared key will
                will be <code class="varname">client specified part</code> +
                <code class="varname">tkey-domain</code>.  Otherwise, the
                name of the shared key will be <code class="varname">random hex
                digits</code> + <code class="varname">tkey-domain</code>.
                In most cases, the <span><strong class="command">domainname</strong></span>
                should be the server's domain name, or an otherwise
                non-existent subdomain like
                "_tkey.<code class="varname">domainname</code>".  If you are
                using GSS-TSIG, this variable must be defined.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">tkey-dhkey</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                The Diffie-Hellman key used by the server
                to generate shared keys with clients using the Diffie-Hellman
                mode
                of <span><strong class="command">TKEY</strong></span>. The server must be
                able to load the
                public and private keys from files in the working directory.
                In
                most cases, the keyname should be the server's host name.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">cache-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                This is for testing only.  Do not use.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dump-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                The pathname of the file the server dumps
                the database to when instructed to do so with
                <span><strong class="command">rndc dumpdb</strong></span>.
                If not specified, the default is <code class="filename">named_dump.db</code>.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">memstatistics-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                The pathname of the file the server writes memory
                usage statistics to on exit. If not specified,
                the default is <code class="filename">named.memstats</code>.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">pid-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                The pathname of the file the server writes its process ID
                in. If not specified, the default is
                <code class="filename">/var/run/named/named.pid</code>.
                The pid-file is used by programs that want to send signals to
                the running
                name server. Specifying <span><strong class="command">pid-file none</strong></span> disables the
                use of a PID file &#8212; no file will be written and any
                existing one will be removed.  Note that <span><strong class="command">none</strong></span>
                is a keyword, not a filename, and therefore is not enclosed
                in
                double quotes.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">recursing-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                The pathname of the file the server dumps
                the queries that are currently recursing when instructed
                to do so with <span><strong class="command">rndc recursing</strong></span>.
                If not specified, the default is <code class="filename">named.recursing</code>.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">statistics-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                The pathname of the file the server appends statistics
                to when instructed to do so using <span><strong class="command">rndc stats</strong></span>.
                If not specified, the default is <code class="filename">named.stats</code> in the
                server's current directory.  The format of the file is
                described
                in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#statsfile" title="The Statistics File">the section called &#8220;The Statistics File&#8221;</a>.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">port</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                The UDP/TCP port number the server uses for
                receiving and sending DNS protocol traffic.
                The default is 53.  This option is mainly intended for server
                testing;
                a server using a port other than 53 will not be able to
                communicate with
                the global DNS.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">random-device</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                The source of entropy to be used by the server.  Entropy is
                primarily needed
                for DNSSEC operations, such as TKEY transactions and dynamic
                update of signed
                zones.  This options specifies the device (or file) from which
                to read
                entropy.  If this is a file, operations requiring entropy will
                fail when the
                file has been exhausted.  If not specified, the default value
                is
                <code class="filename">/dev/random</code>
                (or equivalent) when present, and none otherwise.  The
                <span><strong class="command">random-device</strong></span> option takes
                effect during
                the initial configuration load at server startup time and
                is ignored on subsequent reloads.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">preferred-glue</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                If specified, the listed type (A or AAAA) will be emitted
                before other glue
                in the additional section of a query response.
                The default is not to prefer any type (NONE).
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">root-delegation-only</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                Turn on enforcement of delegation-only in TLDs (top level domains) and root zones
                with an optional
                exclude list.
              </p>
<p>
                Note some TLDs are not delegation only (e.g. "DE", "LV", "US"
                and "MUSEUM").
              </p>
<pre class="programlisting">
options {
        root-delegation-only exclude { "de"; "lv"; "us"; "museum"; };
};
</pre>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">disable-algorithms</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                Disable the specified DNSSEC algorithms at and below the
                specified name.
                Multiple <span><strong class="command">disable-algorithms</strong></span>
                statements are allowed.
                Only the most specific will be applied.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-lookaside</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                When set, <span><strong class="command">dnssec-lookaside</strong></span>
                provides the
                validator with an alternate method to validate DNSKEY records
                at the
                top of a zone.  When a DNSKEY is at or below a domain
                specified by the
                deepest <span><strong class="command">dnssec-lookaside</strong></span>, and
                the normal dnssec validation
                has left the key untrusted, the trust-anchor will be append to
                the key
                name and a DLV record will be looked up to see if it can
                validate the
                key.  If the DLV record validates a DNSKEY (similarly to the
                way a DS
                record does) the DNSKEY RRset is deemed to be trusted.
              </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-must-be-secure</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                Specify hierarchies which must be or may not be secure (signed and
                validated).
                If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, then named will only accept
                answers if they
                are secure.
                If <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>, then normal dnssec validation
                applies
                allowing for insecure answers to be accepted.
                The specified domain must be under a <span><strong class="command">trusted-key</strong></span> or
                <span><strong class="command">dnssec-lookaside</strong></span> must be
                active.
              </p></dd>
</dl></div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="boolean_options"></a>Boolean Options</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">auth-nxdomain</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, then the <span><strong class="command">AA</strong></span> bit
                  is always set on NXDOMAIN responses, even if the server is
                  not actually
                  authoritative. The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>;
                  this is
                  a change from <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8. If you
                  are using very old DNS software, you
                  may need to set it to <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">deallocate-on-exit</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This option was used in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
                  8 to enable checking
                  for memory leaks on exit. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 ignores the option and always performs
                  the checks.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">memstatistics</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Write memory statistics to the file specified by
                  <span><strong class="command">memstatistics-file</strong></span> at exit.
                  The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong> unless
                  '-m record' is specified on the command line in
                  which case it is <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, then the
                  server treats all zones as if they are doing zone transfers
                  across
                  a dial-on-demand dialup link, which can be brought up by
                  traffic
                  originating from this server. This has different effects
                  according
                  to zone type and concentrates the zone maintenance so that
                  it all
                  happens in a short interval, once every <span><strong class="command">heartbeat-interval</strong></span> and
                  hopefully during the one call. It also suppresses some of
                  the normal
                  zone maintenance traffic. The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
                </p>
<p>
                  The <span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span> option
                  may also be specified in the <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> and
                  <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> statements,
                  in which case it overrides the global <span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span>
                  option.
                </p>
<p>
                  If the zone is a master zone, then the server will send out a
                  NOTIFY
                  request to all the slaves (default). This should trigger the
                  zone serial
                  number check in the slave (providing it supports NOTIFY)
                  allowing the slave
                  to verify the zone while the connection is active.
                  The set of servers to which NOTIFY is sent can be controlled
                  by
                  <span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span>.
                </p>
<p>
                  If the
                  zone is a slave or stub zone, then the server will suppress
                  the regular
                  "zone up to date" (refresh) queries and only perform them
                  when the
                  <span><strong class="command">heartbeat-interval</strong></span> expires in
                  addition to sending
                  NOTIFY requests.
                </p>
<p>
                  Finer control can be achieved by using
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>notify</code></strong> which only sends NOTIFY
                  messages,
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>notify-passive</code></strong> which sends NOTIFY
                  messages and
                  suppresses the normal refresh queries, <strong class="userinput"><code>refresh</code></strong>
                  which suppresses normal refresh processing and sends refresh
                  queries
                  when the <span><strong class="command">heartbeat-interval</strong></span>
                  expires, and
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>passive</code></strong> which just disables normal
                  refresh
                  processing.
                </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                          <p>
                            dialup mode
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            normal refresh
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            heart-beat refresh
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            heart-beat notify
                          </p>
                        </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                          <p><span><strong class="command">no</strong></span> (default)</p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            yes
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            no
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            no
                          </p>
                        </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                          <p><span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span></p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            no
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            yes
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            yes
                          </p>
                        </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                          <p><span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span></p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            yes
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            no
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            yes
                          </p>
                        </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                          <p><span><strong class="command">refresh</strong></span></p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            no
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            yes
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            no
                          </p>
                        </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                          <p><span><strong class="command">passive</strong></span></p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            no
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            no
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            no
                          </p>
                        </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                          <p><span><strong class="command">notify-passive</strong></span></p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            no
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            no
                          </p>
                        </td>
<td>
                          <p>
                            yes
                          </p>
                        </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
                  Note that normal NOTIFY processing is not affected by
                  <span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span>.
                </p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">fake-iquery</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8, this option
                  enabled simulating the obsolete DNS query type
                  IQUERY. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 never does
                  IQUERY simulation.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">fetch-glue</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This option is obsolete.
                  In BIND 8, <strong class="userinput"><code>fetch-glue yes</code></strong>
                  caused the server to attempt to fetch glue resource records
                  it
                  didn't have when constructing the additional
                  data section of a response.  This is now considered a bad
                  idea
                  and BIND 9 never does it.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">flush-zones-on-shutdown</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  When the nameserver exits due receiving SIGTERM,
                  flush or do not flush any pending zone writes.  The default
                  is
                  <span><strong class="command">flush-zones-on-shutdown</strong></span> <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">has-old-clients</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This option was incorrectly implemented
                  in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8, and is ignored by <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
                  To achieve the intended effect
                  of
                  <span><strong class="command">has-old-clients</strong></span> <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, specify
                  the two separate options <span><strong class="command">auth-nxdomain</strong></span> <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>
                  and <span><strong class="command">rfc2308-type1</strong></span> <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong> instead.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">host-statistics</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  In BIND 8, this enables keeping of
                  statistics for every host that the name server interacts
                  with.
                  Not implemented in BIND 9.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">maintain-ixfr-base</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  <span class="emphasis"><em>This option is obsolete</em></span>.
                  It was used in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 to
                  determine whether a transaction log was
                  kept for Incremental Zone Transfer. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 maintains a transaction
                  log whenever possible.  If you need to disable outgoing
                  incremental zone
                  transfers, use <span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span> <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">minimal-responses</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, then when generating
                  responses the server will only add records to the authority
                  and additional data sections when they are required (e.g.
                  delegations, negative responses).  This may improve the
                  performance of the server.
                  The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">multiple-cnames</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This option was used in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 to allow
                  a domain name to have multiple CNAME records in violation of
                  the DNS standards.  <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.2 onwards
                  always strictly enforces the CNAME rules both in master
                  files and dynamic updates.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong> (the default),
                  DNS NOTIFY messages are sent when a zone the server is
                  authoritative for
                  changes, see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#notify" title="Notify">the section called &#8220;Notify&#8221;</a>.  The messages are
                  sent to the
                  servers listed in the zone's NS records (except the master
                  server identified
                  in the SOA MNAME field), and to any servers listed in the
                  <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span> option.
                </p>
<p>
                  If <strong class="userinput"><code>master-only</code></strong>, notifies are only
                  sent
                  for master zones.
                  If <strong class="userinput"><code>explicit</code></strong>, notifies are sent only
                  to
                  servers explicitly listed using <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span>.
                  If <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>, no notifies are sent.
                </p>
<p>
                  The <span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span> option may also be
                  specified in the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
                  statement,
                  in which case it overrides the <span><strong class="command">options notify</strong></span> statement.
                  It would only be necessary to turn off this option if it
                  caused slaves
                  to crash.
                </p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-to-soa</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong> do not check the nameservers
                  in the NS RRset against the SOA MNAME.  Normally a NOTIFY
                  message is not sent to the SOA MNAME (SOA ORIGIN) as it is
                  supposed to contain the name of the ultimate master.
                  Sometimes, however, a slave is listed as the SOA MNAME in
                  hidden master configurations and in that case you would
                  want the ultimate master to still send NOTIFY messages to
                  all the nameservers listed in the NS RRset.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">recursion</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, and a
                  DNS query requests recursion, then the server will attempt
                  to do
                  all the work required to answer the query. If recursion is
                  off
                  and the server does not already know the answer, it will
                  return a
                  referral response. The default is
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>.
                  Note that setting <span><strong class="command">recursion no</strong></span> does not prevent
                  clients from getting data from the server's cache; it only
                  prevents new data from being cached as an effect of client
                  queries.
                  Caching may still occur as an effect the server's internal
                  operation, such as NOTIFY address lookups.
                  See also <span><strong class="command">fetch-glue</strong></span> above.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">rfc2308-type1</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  Setting this to <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong> will
                  cause the server to send NS records along with the SOA
                  record for negative
                  answers. The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
                </p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
                    Not yet implemented in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
                    9.
                  </p>
</div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">use-id-pool</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  <span class="emphasis"><em>This option is obsolete</em></span>.
                  <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 always allocates query
                  IDs from a pool.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">zone-statistics</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, the server will collect
                  statistical data on all zones (unless specifically turned
                  off
                  on a per-zone basis by specifying <span><strong class="command">zone-statistics no</strong></span>
                  in the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> statement).
                  These statistics may be accessed
                  using <span><strong class="command">rndc stats</strong></span>, which will
                  dump them to the file listed
                  in the <span><strong class="command">statistics-file</strong></span>.  See
                  also <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#statsfile" title="The Statistics File">the section called &#8220;The Statistics File&#8221;</a>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">use-ixfr</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  <span class="emphasis"><em>This option is obsolete</em></span>.
                  If you need to disable IXFR to a particular server or
                  servers, see
                  the information on the <span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span> option
                  in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#server_statement_definition_and_usage" title="server Statement Definition and
            Usage">the section called &#8220;<span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Definition and
            Usage&#8221;</a>.
                  See also
                  <a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#incremental_zone_transfers" title="Incremental Zone Transfers (IXFR)">the section called &#8220;Incremental Zone Transfers (IXFR)&#8221;</a>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  See the description of
                  <span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span> in
                  <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#server_statement_definition_and_usage" title="server Statement Definition and
            Usage">the section called &#8220;<span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Definition and
            Usage&#8221;</a>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">request-ixfr</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  See the description of
                  <span><strong class="command">request-ixfr</strong></span> in
                  <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#server_statement_definition_and_usage" title="server Statement Definition and
            Usage">the section called &#8220;<span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Definition and
            Usage&#8221;</a>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">treat-cr-as-space</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This option was used in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
                  8 to make
                  the server treat carriage return ("<span><strong class="command">\r</strong></span>") characters the same way
                  as a space or tab character,
                  to facilitate loading of zone files on a UNIX system that
                  were generated
                  on an NT or DOS machine. In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9, both UNIX "<span><strong class="command">\n</strong></span>"
                  and NT/DOS "<span><strong class="command">\r\n</strong></span>" newlines
                  are always accepted,
                  and the option is ignored.
                </p></dd>
<dt>
<span class="term"><span><strong class="command">additional-from-auth</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">additional-from-cache</strong></span></span>
</dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  These options control the behavior of an authoritative
                  server when
                  answering queries which have additional data, or when
                  following CNAME
                  and DNAME chains.
                </p>
<p>
                  When both of these options are set to <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>
                  (the default) and a
                  query is being answered from authoritative data (a zone
                  configured into the server), the additional data section of
                  the
                  reply will be filled in using data from other authoritative
                  zones
                  and from the cache.  In some situations this is undesirable,
                  such
                  as when there is concern over the correctness of the cache,
                  or
                  in servers where slave zones may be added and modified by
                  untrusted third parties.  Also, avoiding
                  the search for this additional data will speed up server
                  operations
                  at the possible expense of additional queries to resolve
                  what would
                  otherwise be provided in the additional section.
                </p>
<p>
                  For example, if a query asks for an MX record for host <code class="literal">foo.example.com</code>,
                  and the record found is "<code class="literal">MX 10 mail.example.net</code>", normally the address
                  records (A and AAAA) for <code class="literal">mail.example.net</code> will be provided as well,
                  if known, even though they are not in the example.com zone.
                  Setting these options to <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>
                  disables this behavior and makes
                  the server only search for additional data in the zone it
                  answers from.
                </p>
<p>
                  These options are intended for use in authoritative-only
                  servers, or in authoritative-only views.  Attempts to set
                  them to <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span> without also
                  specifying
                  <span><strong class="command">recursion no</strong></span> will cause the
                  server to
                  ignore the options and log a warning message.
                </p>
<p>
                  Specifying <span><strong class="command">additional-from-cache no</strong></span> actually
                  disables the use of the cache not only for additional data
                  lookups
                  but also when looking up the answer.  This is usually the
                  desired
                  behavior in an authoritative-only server where the
                  correctness of
                  the cached data is an issue.
                </p>
<p>
                  When a name server is non-recursively queried for a name
                  that is not
                  below the apex of any served zone, it normally answers with
                  an
                  "upwards referral" to the root servers or the servers of
                  some other
                  known parent of the query name.  Since the data in an
                  upwards referral
                  comes from the cache, the server will not be able to provide
                  upwards
                  referrals when <span><strong class="command">additional-from-cache no</strong></span>
                  has been specified.  Instead, it will respond to such
                  queries
                  with REFUSED.  This should not cause any problems since
                  upwards referrals are not required for the resolution
                  process.
                </p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">match-mapped-addresses</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, then an
                  IPv4-mapped IPv6 address will match any address match
                  list entries that match the corresponding IPv4 address.
                  Enabling this option is sometimes useful on IPv6-enabled
                  Linux
                  systems, to work around a kernel quirk that causes IPv4
                  TCP connections such as zone transfers to be accepted
                  on an IPv6 socket using mapped addresses, causing
                  address match lists designed for IPv4 to fail to match.
                  The use of this option for any other purpose is discouraged.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">ixfr-from-differences</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  When <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong> and the server loads a new version of a master
                  zone from its zone file or receives a new version of a slave
                  file by a non-incremental zone transfer, it will compare
                  the new version to the previous one and calculate a set
                  of differences.  The differences are then logged in the
                  zone's journal file such that the changes can be transmitted
                  to downstream slaves as an incremental zone transfer.
                </p>
<p>
                  By allowing incremental zone transfers to be used for
                  non-dynamic zones, this option saves bandwidth at the
                  expense of increased CPU and memory consumption at the
                  master.
                  In particular, if the new version of a zone is completely
                  different from the previous one, the set of differences
                  will be of a size comparable to the combined size of the
                  old and new zone version, and the server will need to
                  temporarily allocate memory to hold this complete
                  difference set.
                </p>
<p><span><strong class="command">ixfr-from-differences</strong></span>
                  also accepts <span><strong class="command">master</strong></span> and
                  <span><strong class="command">slave</strong></span> at the view and options
                  levels which causes
                  <span><strong class="command">ixfr-from-differences</strong></span> to be enabled for
                  all <span><strong class="command">master</strong></span> or
                  <span><strong class="command">slave</strong></span> zones respectively.
                  It is off by default.
                </p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">multi-master</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This should be set when you have multiple masters for a zone
                  and the
                  addresses refer to different machines.  If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, named will
                  not log
                  when the serial number on the master is less than what named
                  currently
                  has.  The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-enable</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Enable DNSSEC support in named.  Unless set to <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>,
                  named behaves as if it does not support DNSSEC.
                  The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-validation</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Enable DNSSEC validation in named.
                  Note <span><strong class="command">dnssec-enable</strong></span> also needs to be
                  set to <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong> to be effective.
                  The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-accept-expired</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Accept expired signatures when verifying DNSSEC signatures.
                  The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
                  Setting this option to "yes" leaves named vulnerable to replay attacks.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">querylog</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specify whether query logging should be started when named
                  starts.
                  If <span><strong class="command">querylog</strong></span> is not specified,
                  then the query logging
                  is determined by the presence of the logging category <span><strong class="command">queries</strong></span>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-names</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  This option is used to restrict the character set and syntax
                  of
                  certain domain names in master files and/or DNS responses
                  received
                  from the network.  The default varies according to usage
                  area.  For
                  <span><strong class="command">master</strong></span> zones the default is <span><strong class="command">fail</strong></span>.
                  For <span><strong class="command">slave</strong></span> zones the default
                  is <span><strong class="command">warn</strong></span>.
                  For answers received from the network (<span><strong class="command">response</strong></span>)
                  the default is <span><strong class="command">ignore</strong></span>.
                </p>
<p>
                  The rules for legal hostnames and mail domains are derived
                  from RFC 952 and RFC 821 as modified by RFC 1123.
                </p>
<p><span><strong class="command">check-names</strong></span>
                  applies to the owner names of A, AAAA and MX records.
                  It also applies to the domain names in the RDATA of NS, SOA
                  and MX records.
                  It also applies to the RDATA of PTR records where the owner
                  name indicated that it is a reverse lookup of a hostname
                  (the owner name ends in IN-ADDR.ARPA, IP6.ARPA, or IP6.INT).
                </p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-mx</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Check whether the MX record appears to refer to a IP address.
                  The default is to <span><strong class="command">warn</strong></span>.  Other possible
                  values are <span><strong class="command">fail</strong></span> and
                  <span><strong class="command">ignore</strong></span>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-wildcard</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This option is used to check for non-terminal wildcards.
                  The use of non-terminal wildcards is almost always as a
                  result of a failure
                  to understand the wildcard matching algorithm (RFC 1034).
                  This option
                  affects master zones.  The default (<span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>) is to check
                  for non-terminal wildcards and issue a warning.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-integrity</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Perform post load zone integrity checks on master
                  zones.  This checks that MX and SRV records refer
                  to address (A or AAAA) records and that glue
                  address records exist for delegated zones.  For
                  MX and SRV records only in-zone hostnames are
                  checked (for out-of-zone hostnames use
                  <span><strong class="command">named-checkzone</strong></span>).
                  For NS records only names below top of zone are
                  checked (for out-of-zone names and glue consistency
                  checks use <span><strong class="command">named-checkzone</strong></span>).
                  The default is <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-mx-cname</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  If <span><strong class="command">check-integrity</strong></span> is set then
                  fail, warn or ignore MX records that refer
                  to CNAMES.  The default is to <span><strong class="command">warn</strong></span>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-srv-cname</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  If <span><strong class="command">check-integrity</strong></span> is set then
                  fail, warn or ignore SRV records that refer
                  to CNAMES.  The default is to <span><strong class="command">warn</strong></span>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-sibling</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  When performing integrity checks, also check that
                  sibling glue exists.  The default is <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">zero-no-soa-ttl</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  When returning authoritative negative responses to
                  SOA queries set the TTL of the SOA record returned in
                  the authority section to zero.
                  The default is <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">zero-no-soa-ttl-cache</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  When caching a negative response to a SOA query
                  set the TTL to zero.
                  The default is <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">update-check-ksk</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  When regenerating the RRSIGs following a UPDATE
                  request to a secure zone, check the KSK flag on
                  the DNSKEY RR to determine if this key should be
                  used to generate the RRSIG.  This flag is ignored
                  if there are not DNSKEY RRs both with and without
                  a KSK.
                  The default is <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">try-tcp-refresh</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Try to refresh the zone using TCP if UDP queries fail.
                  For BIND 8 compatibility, the default is
                  <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>.
                </p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2581106"></a>Forwarding</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            The forwarding facility can be used to create a large site-wide
            cache on a few servers, reducing traffic over links to external
            name servers. It can also be used to allow queries by servers that
            do not have direct access to the Internet, but wish to look up
            exterior
            names anyway. Forwarding occurs only on those queries for which
            the server is not authoritative and does not have the answer in
            its cache.
          </p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">forward</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This option is only meaningful if the
                  forwarders list is not empty. A value of <code class="varname">first</code>,
                  the default, causes the server to query the forwarders
                  first &#8212; and
                  if that doesn't answer the question, the server will then
                  look for
                  the answer itself. If <code class="varname">only</code> is
                  specified, the
                  server will only query the forwarders.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">forwarders</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specifies the IP addresses to be used
                  for forwarding. The default is the empty list (no
                  forwarding).
                </p></dd>
</dl></div>
<p>
            Forwarding can also be configured on a per-domain basis, allowing
            for the global forwarding options to be overridden in a variety
            of ways. You can set particular domains to use different
            forwarders,
            or have a different <span><strong class="command">forward only/first</strong></span> behavior,
            or not forward at all, see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_statement_grammar" title="zone
            Statement Grammar">the section called &#8220;<span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
            Statement Grammar&#8221;</a>.
          </p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2581164"></a>Dual-stack Servers</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            Dual-stack servers are used as servers of last resort to work
            around
            problems in reachability due the lack of support for either IPv4
            or IPv6
            on the host machine.
          </p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dual-stack-servers</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specifies host names or addresses of machines with access to
                  both IPv4 and IPv6 transports. If a hostname is used, the
                  server must be able
                  to resolve the name using only the transport it has.  If the
                  machine is dual
                  stacked, then the <span><strong class="command">dual-stack-servers</strong></span> have no effect unless
                  access to a transport has been disabled on the command line
                  (e.g. <span><strong class="command">named -4</strong></span>).
                </p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="access_control"></a>Access Control</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            Access to the server can be restricted based on the IP address
            of the requesting system. See <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#address_match_lists" title="Address Match Lists">the section called &#8220;Address Match Lists&#8221;</a> for
            details on how to specify IP address lists.
          </p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-notify</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specifies which hosts are allowed to
                  notify this server, a slave, of zone changes in addition
                  to the zone masters.
                  <span><strong class="command">allow-notify</strong></span> may also be
                  specified in the
                  <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> statement, in which case
                  it overrides the
                  <span><strong class="command">options allow-notify</strong></span>
                  statement.  It is only meaningful
                  for a slave zone.  If not specified, the default is to
                  process notify messages
                  only from a zone's master.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  Specifies which hosts are allowed to ask ordinary
                  DNS questions. <span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span> may
                  also be specified in the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
                  statement, in which case it overrides the
                  <span><strong class="command">options allow-query</strong></span> statement.
                  If not specified, the default is to allow queries
                  from all hosts.
                </p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
                    <span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache</strong></span> is now
                    used to specify access to the cache.
                  </p>
</div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-query-on</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  Specifies which local addresses can accept ordinary
                  DNS questions. This makes it possible, for instance,
                  to allow queries on internal-facing interfaces but
                  disallow them on external-facing ones, without
                  necessarily knowing the internal network's addresses.
                </p>
<p>
                  <span><strong class="command">allow-query-on</strong></span> may
                  also be specified in the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
                  statement, in which case it overrides the
                  <span><strong class="command">options allow-query-on</strong></span> statement.
                </p>
<p>
                  If not specified, the default is to allow queries
                  on all addresses.
                </p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
                    <span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache</strong></span> is
                    used to specify access to the cache.
                  </p>
</div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specifies which hosts are allowed to get answers
                  from the cache.  If <span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache</strong></span>
                  is not set then <span><strong class="command">allow-recursion</strong></span>
                  is used if set, otherwise <span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span>
                  is used if set, otherwise the default
                  (<span><strong class="command">localnets;</strong></span>
                  <span><strong class="command">localhost;</strong></span>) is used.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache-on</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specifies which local addresses can give answers
                  from the cache.  If not specified, the default is
                  to allow cache queries on any address,
                  <span><strong class="command">localnets</strong></span> and
                  <span><strong class="command">localhost</strong></span>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-recursion</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specifies which hosts are allowed to make recursive
                  queries through this server. If
                  <span><strong class="command">allow-recursion</strong></span> is not set
                  then <span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache</strong></span> is
                  used if set, otherwise <span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span>
                  is used if set, otherwise the default
                  (<span><strong class="command">localnets;</strong></span>
                  <span><strong class="command">localhost;</strong></span>) is used.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-recursion-on</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specifies which local addresses can accept recursive
                  queries.  If not specified, the default is to allow
                  recursive queries on all addresses.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specifies which hosts are allowed to
                  submit Dynamic DNS updates for master zones. The default is
                  to deny
                  updates from all hosts.  Note that allowing updates based
                  on the requestor's IP address is insecure; see
                  <a href="Bv9ARM.ch07.html#dynamic_update_security" title="Dynamic Update Security">the section called &#8220;Dynamic Update Security&#8221;</a> for details.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-update-forwarding</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  Specifies which hosts are allowed to
                  submit Dynamic DNS updates to slave zones to be forwarded to
                  the
                  master.  The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>{ none; }</code></strong>,
                  which
                  means that no update forwarding will be performed.  To
                  enable
                  update forwarding, specify
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>allow-update-forwarding { any; };</code></strong>.
                  Specifying values other than <strong class="userinput"><code>{ none; }</code></strong> or
                  <strong class="userinput"><code>{ any; }</code></strong> is usually
                  counterproductive, since
                  the responsibility for update access control should rest
                  with the
                  master server, not the slaves.
                </p>
<p>
                  Note that enabling the update forwarding feature on a slave
                  server
                  may expose master servers relying on insecure IP address
                  based
                  access control to attacks; see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch07.html#dynamic_update_security" title="Dynamic Update Security">the section called &#8220;Dynamic Update Security&#8221;</a>
                  for more details.
                </p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-v6-synthesis</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This option was introduced for the smooth transition from
                  AAAA
                  to A6 and from "nibble labels" to binary labels.
                  However, since both A6 and binary labels were then
                  deprecated,
                  this option was also deprecated.
                  It is now ignored with some warning messages.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-transfer</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specifies which hosts are allowed to
                  receive zone transfers from the server. <span><strong class="command">allow-transfer</strong></span> may
                  also be specified in the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
                  statement, in which
                  case it overrides the <span><strong class="command">options allow-transfer</strong></span> statement.
                  If not specified, the default is to allow transfers to all
                  hosts.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">blackhole</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specifies a list of addresses that the
                  server will not accept queries from or use to resolve a
                  query. Queries
                  from these addresses will not be responded to. The default
                  is <strong class="userinput"><code>none</code></strong>.
                </p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2581660"></a>Interfaces</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            The interfaces and ports that the server will answer queries
            from may be specified using the <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> option. <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> takes
            an optional port, and an <code class="varname">address_match_list</code>.
            The server will listen on all interfaces allowed by the address
            match list. If a port is not specified, port 53 will be used.
          </p>
<p>
            Multiple <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> statements are
            allowed.
            For example,
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">listen-on { 5.6.7.8; };
listen-on port 1234 { !1.2.3.4; 1.2/16; };
</pre>
<p>
            will enable the name server on port 53 for the IP address
            5.6.7.8, and on port 1234 of an address on the machine in net
            1.2 that is not 1.2.3.4.
          </p>
<p>
            If no <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> is specified, the
            server will listen on port 53 on all IPv4 interfaces.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">listen-on-v6</strong></span> option is used to
            specify the interfaces and the ports on which the server will
            listen
            for incoming queries sent using IPv6.
          </p>
<p>
            When </p>
<pre class="programlisting">{ any; }</pre>
<p> is
            specified
            as the <code class="varname">address_match_list</code> for the
            <span><strong class="command">listen-on-v6</strong></span> option,
            the server does not bind a separate socket to each IPv6 interface
            address as it does for IPv4 if the operating system has enough API
            support for IPv6 (specifically if it conforms to RFC 3493 and RFC
            3542).
            Instead, it listens on the IPv6 wildcard address.
            If the system only has incomplete API support for IPv6, however,
            the behavior is the same as that for IPv4.
          </p>
<p>
            A list of particular IPv6 addresses can also be specified, in
            which case
            the server listens on a separate socket for each specified
            address,
            regardless of whether the desired API is supported by the system.
          </p>
<p>
            Multiple <span><strong class="command">listen-on-v6</strong></span> options can
            be used.
            For example,
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">listen-on-v6 { any; };
listen-on-v6 port 1234 { !2001:db8::/32; any; };
</pre>
<p>
            will enable the name server on port 53 for any IPv6 addresses
            (with a single wildcard socket),
            and on port 1234 of IPv6 addresses that is not in the prefix
            2001:db8::/32 (with separate sockets for each matched address.)
          </p>
<p>
            To make the server not listen on any IPv6 address, use
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">listen-on-v6 { none; };
</pre>
<p>
            If no <span><strong class="command">listen-on-v6</strong></span> option is
            specified, the server will not listen on any IPv6 address
            unless <span><strong class="command">-6</strong></span> is specified when named is
            invoked.  If <span><strong class="command">-6</strong></span> is specified then
            named will listen on port 53 on all IPv6 interfaces by default.
          </p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="query_address"></a>Query Address</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            If the server doesn't know the answer to a question, it will
            query other name servers. <span><strong class="command">query-source</strong></span> specifies
            the address and port used for such queries. For queries sent over
            IPv6, there is a separate <span><strong class="command">query-source-v6</strong></span> option.
            If <span><strong class="command">address</strong></span> is <span><strong class="command">*</strong></span> (asterisk) or is omitted,
            a wildcard IP address (<span><strong class="command">INADDR_ANY</strong></span>)
            will be used.
          </p>
<p>
            If <span><strong class="command">port</strong></span> is <span><strong class="command">*</strong></span> or is omitted,
            a random port number from a pre-configured
            range is picked up and will be used for each query.
            The port range(s) is that specified in
            the <span><strong class="command">use-v4-udp-ports</strong></span> (for IPv4)
            and <span><strong class="command">use-v6-udp-ports</strong></span> (for IPv6)
            options, excluding the ranges specified in
            the <span><strong class="command">avoid-v4-udp-ports</strong></span>
            and <span><strong class="command">avoid-v6-udp-ports</strong></span> options, respectively.
          </p>
<p>
            The defaults of the <span><strong class="command">query-source</strong></span> and
            <span><strong class="command">query-source-v6</strong></span> options
            are:
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">query-source address * port *;
query-source-v6 address * port *;
</pre>
<p>
            If <span><strong class="command">use-v4-udp-ports</strong></span> or
            <span><strong class="command">use-v6-udp-ports</strong></span> is unspecified,
            <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will check if the operating
            system provides a programming interface to retrieve the
            system's default range for ephemeral ports.
            If such an interface is available,
            <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will use the corresponding system
            default range; otherwise, it will use its own defaults:
         </p>
<pre class="programlisting">use-v4-udp-ports { range 1024 65535; };
use-v6-udp-ports { range 1024 65535; };
</pre>
<p>
            Note: make sure the ranges be sufficiently large for
            security.  A desirable size depends on various parameters,
            but we generally recommend it contain at least 16384 ports
            (14 bits of entropy).
            Note also that the system's default range when used may be
            too small for this purpose, and that the range may even be
            changed while <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> is running; the new
            range will automatically be applied when <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>
            is reloaded.
            It is encouraged to
            configure <span><strong class="command">use-v4-udp-ports</strong></span> and
            <span><strong class="command">use-v6-udp-ports</strong></span> explicitly so that the
            ranges are sufficiently large and are reasonably
            independent from the ranges used by other applications.
          </p>
<p>
            Note: the operational configuration
            where <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> runs may prohibit the use
            of some ports.  For example, UNIX systems will not allow
            <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> running without a root privilege
            to use ports less than 1024.
            If such ports are included in the specified (or detected)
            set of query ports, the corresponding query attempts will
            fail, resulting in resolution failures or delay.
            It is therefore important to configure the set of ports
            that can be safely used in the expected operational environment.
          </p>
<p>
            The defaults of the <span><strong class="command">avoid-v4-udp-ports</strong></span> and
            <span><strong class="command">avoid-v6-udp-ports</strong></span> options
            are:
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">avoid-v4-udp-ports {};
avoid-v6-udp-ports {};
</pre>
<p>
            Note: BIND 9.5.0 introduced
            the <span><strong class="command">use-queryport-pool</strong></span> 
            option to support a pool of such random ports, but this
            option is now obsolete because reusing the same ports in
            the pool may not be sufficiently secure.
            For the same reason, it is generally strongly discouraged to
            specify a particular port for the
            <span><strong class="command">query-source</strong></span> or
            <span><strong class="command">query-source-v6</strong></span> options;
            it implicitly disables the use of randomized port numbers.
          </p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">use-queryport-pool</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This option is obsolete.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">queryport-pool-ports</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This option is obsolete.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">queryport-pool-updateinterval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This option is obsolete.
                </p></dd>
</dl></div>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
              The address specified in the <span><strong class="command">query-source</strong></span> option
              is used for both UDP and TCP queries, but the port applies only
              to UDP queries.  TCP queries always use a random
              unprivileged port.
            </p>
</div>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
              Solaris 2.5.1 and earlier does not support setting the source
              address for TCP sockets.
            </p>
</div>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
              See also <span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> and
              <span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span>.
            </p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="zone_transfers"></a>Zone Transfers</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> has mechanisms in place to
            facilitate zone transfers
            and set limits on the amount of load that transfers place on the
            system. The following options apply to zone transfers.
          </p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Defines a global list of IP addresses of name servers
                  that are also sent NOTIFY messages whenever a fresh copy of
                  the
                  zone is loaded, in addition to the servers listed in the
                  zone's NS records.
                  This helps to ensure that copies of the zones will
                  quickly converge on stealth servers. If an <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span> list
                  is given in a <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> statement,
                  it will override
                  the <span><strong class="command">options also-notify</strong></span>
                  statement. When a <span><strong class="command">zone notify</strong></span>
                  statement
                  is set to <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>, the IP
                  addresses in the global <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span> list will
                  not be sent NOTIFY messages for that zone. The default is
                  the empty
                  list (no global notification list).
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-time-in</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Inbound zone transfers running longer than
                  this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 120
                  minutes
                  (2 hours).  The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-idle-in</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Inbound zone transfers making no progress
                  in this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 60
                  minutes
                  (1 hour).  The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-time-out</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Outbound zone transfers running longer than
                  this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 120
                  minutes
                  (2 hours).  The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-idle-out</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Outbound zone transfers making no progress
                  in this many minutes will be terminated.  The default is 60
                  minutes (1
                  hour).  The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">serial-query-rate</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Slave servers will periodically query master servers
                  to find out if zone serial numbers have changed. Each such
                  query uses
                  a minute amount of the slave server's network bandwidth.  To
                  limit the
                  amount of bandwidth used, BIND 9 limits the rate at which
                  queries are
                  sent.  The value of the <span><strong class="command">serial-query-rate</strong></span> option,
                  an integer, is the maximum number of queries sent per
                  second.
                  The default is 20.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">serial-queries</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  In BIND 8, the <span><strong class="command">serial-queries</strong></span>
                  option
                  set the maximum number of concurrent serial number queries
                  allowed to be outstanding at any given time.
                  BIND 9 does not limit the number of outstanding
                  serial queries and ignores the <span><strong class="command">serial-queries</strong></span> option.
                  Instead, it limits the rate at which the queries are sent
                  as defined using the <span><strong class="command">serial-query-rate</strong></span> option.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfer-format</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Zone transfers can be sent using two different formats,
                  <span><strong class="command">one-answer</strong></span> and
                  <span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span>.
                  The <span><strong class="command">transfer-format</strong></span> option is used
                  on the master server to determine which format it sends.
                  <span><strong class="command">one-answer</strong></span> uses one DNS message per
                  resource record transferred.
                  <span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span> packs as many resource
                  records as possible into a message.
                  <span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span> is more efficient, but is
                  only supported by relatively new slave servers,
                  such as <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9, <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
                  8.x and <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 4.9.5 onwards.
                  The <span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span> format is also supported by
                  recent Microsoft Windows nameservers.
                  The default is <span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span>.
                  <span><strong class="command">transfer-format</strong></span> may be overridden on a
                  per-server basis by using the <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span>
                  statement.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfers-in</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The maximum number of inbound zone transfers
                  that can be running concurrently. The default value is <code class="literal">10</code>.
                  Increasing <span><strong class="command">transfers-in</strong></span> may
                  speed up the convergence
                  of slave zones, but it also may increase the load on the
                  local system.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfers-out</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The maximum number of outbound zone transfers
                  that can be running concurrently. Zone transfer requests in
                  excess
                  of the limit will be refused. The default value is <code class="literal">10</code>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfers-per-ns</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The maximum number of inbound zone transfers
                  that can be concurrently transferring from a given remote
                  name server.
                  The default value is <code class="literal">2</code>.
                  Increasing <span><strong class="command">transfers-per-ns</strong></span>
                  may
                  speed up the convergence of slave zones, but it also may
                  increase
                  the load on the remote name server. <span><strong class="command">transfers-per-ns</strong></span> may
                  be overridden on a per-server basis by using the <span><strong class="command">transfers</strong></span> phrase
                  of the <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> statement.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p><span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span>
                  determines which local address will be bound to IPv4
                  TCP connections used to fetch zones transferred
                  inbound by the server.  It also determines the
                  source IPv4 address, and optionally the UDP port,
                  used for the refresh queries and forwarded dynamic
                  updates.  If not set, it defaults to a system
                  controlled value which will usually be the address
                  of the interface "closest to" the remote end. This
                  address must appear in the remote end's
                  <span><strong class="command">allow-transfer</strong></span> option for the
                  zone being transferred, if one is specified. This
                  statement sets the
                  <span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> for all zones,
                  but can be overridden on a per-view or per-zone
                  basis by including a
                  <span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> statement within
                  the <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> or
                  <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> block in the configuration
                  file.
                </p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
                    Solaris 2.5.1 and earlier does not support setting the
                    source address for TCP sockets.
                  </p>
</div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The same as <span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span>,
                  except zone transfers are performed using IPv6.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">alt-transfer-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
                  <span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> fails and
                  <span><strong class="command">use-alt-transfer-source</strong></span> is
                  set.
                </p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
                  If you do not wish the alternate transfer source
                  to be used, you should set
                  <span><strong class="command">use-alt-transfer-source</strong></span>
                  appropriately and you should not depend upon
                  getting a answer back to the first refresh
                  query.
                </div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">alt-transfer-source-v6</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
                  <span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span> fails and
                  <span><strong class="command">use-alt-transfer-source</strong></span> is
                  set.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">use-alt-transfer-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Use the alternate transfer sources or not.  If views are
                  specified this defaults to <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>
                  otherwise it defaults to
                  <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span> (for BIND 8
                  compatibility).
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p><span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span>
                  determines which local source address, and
                  optionally UDP port, will be used to send NOTIFY
                  messages.  This address must appear in the slave
                  server's <span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> zone clause or
                  in an <span><strong class="command">allow-notify</strong></span> clause.  This
                  statement sets the <span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span>
                  for all zones, but can be overridden on a per-zone or
                  per-view basis by including a
                  <span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span> statement within
                  the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> or
                  <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> block in the configuration
                  file.
                </p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
                    Solaris 2.5.1 and earlier does not support setting the
                    source address for TCP sockets.
                  </p>
</div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-source-v6</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Like <span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span>,
                  but applies to notify messages sent to IPv6 addresses.
                </p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2582923"></a>UDP Port Lists</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            <span><strong class="command">use-v4-udp-ports</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">avoid-v4-udp-ports</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">use-v6-udp-ports</strong></span>, and
            <span><strong class="command">avoid-v6-udp-ports</strong></span>
            specify a list of IPv4 and IPv6 UDP ports that will be
            used or not used as source ports for UDP messages.
            See <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#query_address" title="Query Address">the section called &#8220;Query Address&#8221;</a> about how the
            available ports are determined.
            For example, with the following configuration
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">
use-v6-udp-ports { range 32768 65535; };
avoid-v6-udp-ports { 40000; range 50000 60000; };
</pre>
<p>
             UDP ports of IPv6 messages sent
             from <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will be in one
             of the following ranges: 32768 to 39999, 40001 to 49999,
             and 60001 to 65535.
           </p>
<p>
             <span><strong class="command">avoid-v4-udp-ports</strong></span> and
             <span><strong class="command">avoid-v6-udp-ports</strong></span> can be used
             to prevent <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> from choosing as its random source port a
             port that is blocked by your firewall or a port that is
             used by other applications;
             if a query went out with a source port blocked by a
             firewall, the
             answer would not get by the firewall and the name server would
             have to query again.
             Note: the desired range can also be represented only with
             <span><strong class="command">use-v4-udp-ports</strong></span> and
             <span><strong class="command">use-v6-udp-ports</strong></span>, and the
             <span><strong class="command">avoid-</strong></span> options are redundant in that
             sense; they are provided for backward compatibility and
             to possibly simplify the port specification.
           </p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2582983"></a>Operating System Resource Limits</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            The server's usage of many system resources can be limited.
            Scaled values are allowed when specifying resource limits.  For
            example, <span><strong class="command">1G</strong></span> can be used instead of
            <span><strong class="command">1073741824</strong></span> to specify a limit of
            one
            gigabyte. <span><strong class="command">unlimited</strong></span> requests
            unlimited use, or the
            maximum available amount. <span><strong class="command">default</strong></span>
            uses the limit
            that was in force when the server was started. See the description
            of <span><strong class="command">size_spec</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#configuration_file_elements" title="Configuration File Elements">the section called &#8220;Configuration File Elements&#8221;</a>.
          </p>
<p>
            The following options set operating system resource limits for
            the name server process.  Some operating systems don't support
            some or
            any of the limits. On such systems, a warning will be issued if
            the
            unsupported limit is used.
          </p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">coresize</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The maximum size of a core dump. The default
                  is <code class="literal">default</code>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">datasize</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The maximum amount of data memory the server
                  may use. The default is <code class="literal">default</code>.
                  This is a hard limit on server memory usage.
                  If the server attempts to allocate memory in excess of this
                  limit, the allocation will fail, which may in turn leave
                  the server unable to perform DNS service.  Therefore,
                  this option is rarely useful as a way of limiting the
                  amount of memory used by the server, but it can be used
                  to raise an operating system data size limit that is
                  too small by default.  If you wish to limit the amount
                  of memory used by the server, use the
                  <span><strong class="command">max-cache-size</strong></span> and
                  <span><strong class="command">recursive-clients</strong></span>
                  options instead.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">files</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The maximum number of files the server
                  may have open concurrently. The default is <code class="literal">unlimited</code>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">stacksize</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The maximum amount of stack memory the server
                  may use. The default is <code class="literal">default</code>.
                </p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="server_resource_limits"></a>Server  Resource Limits</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            The following options set limits on the server's
            resource consumption that are enforced internally by the
            server rather than the operating system.
          </p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-ixfr-log-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This option is obsolete; it is accepted
                  and ignored for BIND 8 compatibility.  The option
                  <span><strong class="command">max-journal-size</strong></span> performs a
                  similar function in BIND 9.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-journal-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Sets a maximum size for each journal file
                  (see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#journal" title="The journal file">the section called &#8220;The journal file&#8221;</a>).  When the journal file
                  approaches
                  the specified size, some of the oldest transactions in the
                  journal
                  will be automatically removed.  The default is
                  <code class="literal">unlimited</code>.
                  This may also be set on a per-zone basis.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">host-statistics-max</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  In BIND 8, specifies the maximum number of host statistics
                  entries to be kept.
                  Not implemented in BIND 9.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">recursive-clients</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The maximum number of simultaneous recursive lookups
                  the server will perform on behalf of clients.  The default
                  is
                  <code class="literal">1000</code>.  Because each recursing
                  client uses a fair
                  bit of memory, on the order of 20 kilobytes, the value of
                  the
                  <span><strong class="command">recursive-clients</strong></span> option may
                  have to be decreased
                  on hosts with limited memory.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">tcp-clients</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The maximum number of simultaneous client TCP
                  connections that the server will accept.
                  The default is <code class="literal">100</code>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">reserved-sockets</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  The number of file descriptors reserved for TCP, stdio,
                  etc.  This needs to be big enough to cover the number of
                  interfaces named listens on, tcp-clients as well as
                  to provide room for outgoing TCP queries and incoming zone
                  transfers.  The default is <code class="literal">512</code>.
                  The minimum value is <code class="literal">128</code> and the
                  maximum value is <code class="literal">128</code> less than
                  maxsockets (-S).  This option may be removed in the future.
                </p>
<p>
                  This option has little effect on Windows.
                </p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-cache-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The maximum amount of memory to use for the
                  server's cache, in bytes.
                  When the amount of data in the cache
                  reaches this limit, the server will cause records to expire
                  prematurely based on an LRU based strategy so that
                  the limit is not exceeded.
                  A value of 0 is special, meaning that
                  records are purged from the cache only when their
                  TTLs expire.
                  Another special keyword <strong class="userinput"><code>unlimited</code></strong>
                  means the maximum value of 32-bit unsigned integers
                  (0xffffffff), which may not have the same effect as
                  0 on machines that support more than 32 bits of
                  memory space.
                  Any positive values less than 2MB will be ignored reset
                  to 2MB.
                  In a server with multiple views, the limit applies
                  separately to the cache of each view.
                  The default is 0.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">tcp-listen-queue</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The listen queue depth.  The default and minimum is 3.
                  If the kernel supports the accept filter "dataready" this
                  also controls how
                  many TCP connections that will be queued in kernel space
                  waiting for
                  some data before being passed to accept.  Values less than 3
                  will be
                  silently raised.
                </p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2583331"></a>Periodic Task Intervals</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">cleaning-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  This interval is effectively obsolete.  Previously,
                  the server would remove expired resource records
                  from the cache every <span><strong class="command">cleaning-interval</strong></span> minutes.
                  <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 now manages cache
                  memory in a more sophisticated manner and does not
                  rely on the periodic cleaning any more.
                  Specifying this option therefore has no effect on
                  the server's behavior.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">heartbeat-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The server will perform zone maintenance tasks
                  for all zones marked as <span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span> whenever this
                  interval expires. The default is 60 minutes. Reasonable
                  values are up
                  to 1 day (1440 minutes).  The maximum value is 28 days
                  (40320 minutes).
                  If set to 0, no zone maintenance for these zones will occur.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">interface-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The server will scan the network interface list
                  every <span><strong class="command">interface-interval</strong></span>
                  minutes. The default
                  is 60 minutes. The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
                  If set to 0, interface scanning will only occur when
                  the configuration file is  loaded. After the scan, the
                  server will
                  begin listening for queries on any newly discovered
                  interfaces (provided they are allowed by the
                  <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> configuration), and
                  will
                  stop listening on interfaces that have gone away.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">statistics-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  Name server statistics will be logged
                  every <span><strong class="command">statistics-interval</strong></span>
                  minutes. The default is
                  60. The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
                  If set to 0, no statistics will be logged.
                  </p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
                    Not yet implemented in
                    <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
                  </p>
</div>
</dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="topology"></a>Topology</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            All other things being equal, when the server chooses a name
            server
            to query from a list of name servers, it prefers the one that is
            topologically closest to itself. The <span><strong class="command">topology</strong></span> statement
            takes an <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span> and
            interprets it
            in a special way. Each top-level list element is assigned a
            distance.
            Non-negated elements get a distance based on their position in the
            list, where the closer the match is to the start of the list, the
            shorter the distance is between it and the server. A negated match
            will be assigned the maximum distance from the server. If there
            is no match, the address will get a distance which is further than
            any non-negated list element, and closer than any negated element.
            For example,
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">topology {
    10/8;
    !1.2.3/24;
    { 1.2/16; 3/8; };
};</pre>
<p>
            will prefer servers on network 10 the most, followed by hosts
            on network 1.2.0.0 (netmask 255.255.0.0) and network 3, with the
            exception of hosts on network 1.2.3 (netmask 255.255.255.0), which
            is preferred least of all.
          </p>
<p>
            The default topology is
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">    topology { localhost; localnets; };
</pre>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
              The <span><strong class="command">topology</strong></span> option
              is not implemented in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
            </p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="the_sortlist_statement"></a>The <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span> Statement</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            The response to a DNS query may consist of multiple resource
            records (RRs) forming a resource records set (RRset).
            The name server will normally return the
            RRs within the RRset in an indeterminate order
            (but see the <span><strong class="command">rrset-order</strong></span>
            statement in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#rrset_ordering" title="RRset Ordering">the section called &#8220;RRset Ordering&#8221;</a>).
            The client resolver code should rearrange the RRs as appropriate,
            that is, using any addresses on the local net in preference to
            other addresses.
            However, not all resolvers can do this or are correctly
            configured.
            When a client is using a local server, the sorting can be performed
            in the server, based on the client's address. This only requires
            configuring the name servers, not all the clients.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span> statement (see below)
            takes
            an <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span> and
            interprets it even
            more specifically than the <span><strong class="command">topology</strong></span>
            statement
            does (<a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#topology" title="Topology">the section called &#8220;Topology&#8221;</a>).
            Each top level statement in the <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span> must
            itself be an explicit <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span> with
            one or two elements. The first element (which may be an IP
            address,
            an IP prefix, an ACL name or a nested <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span>)
            of each top level list is checked against the source address of
            the query until a match is found.
          </p>
<p>
            Once the source address of the query has been matched, if
            the top level statement contains only one element, the actual
            primitive
            element that matched the source address is used to select the
            address
            in the response to move to the beginning of the response. If the
            statement is a list of two elements, then the second element is
            treated the same as the <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span> in
            a <span><strong class="command">topology</strong></span> statement. Each top
            level element
            is assigned a distance and the address in the response with the
            minimum
            distance is moved to the beginning of the response.
          </p>
<p>
            In the following example, any queries received from any of
            the addresses of the host itself will get responses preferring
            addresses
            on any of the locally connected networks. Next most preferred are
            addresses
            on the 192.168.1/24 network, and after that either the
            192.168.2/24
            or
            192.168.3/24 network with no preference shown between these two
            networks. Queries received from a host on the 192.168.1/24 network
            will prefer other addresses on that network to the 192.168.2/24
            and
            192.168.3/24 networks. Queries received from a host on the
            192.168.4/24
            or the 192.168.5/24 network will only prefer other addresses on
            their directly connected networks.
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">sortlist {
    { localhost;                                   // IF   the local host
        { localnets;                               // THEN first fit on the
            192.168.1/24;                          //   following nets
            { 192.168.2/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
    { 192.168.1/24;                                // IF   on class C 192.168.1
        { 192.168.1/24;                            // THEN use .1, or .2 or .3
            { 192.168.2/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
    { 192.168.2/24;                                // IF   on class C 192.168.2
        { 192.168.2/24;                            // THEN use .2, or .1 or .3
            { 192.168.1/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
    { 192.168.3/24;                                // IF   on class C 192.168.3
        { 192.168.3/24;                            // THEN use .3, or .1 or .2
            { 192.168.1/24; 192.168.2/24; }; }; };
    { { 192.168.4/24; 192.168.5/24; };             // if .4 or .5, prefer that net
    };
};</pre>
<p>
            The following example will give reasonable behavior for the
            local host and hosts on directly connected networks. It is similar
            to the behavior of the address sort in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 4.9.x. Responses sent
            to queries from the local host will favor any of the directly
            connected
            networks. Responses sent to queries from any other hosts on a
            directly
            connected network will prefer addresses on that same network.
            Responses
            to other queries will not be sorted.
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">sortlist {
           { localhost; localnets; };
           { localnets; };
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="rrset_ordering"></a>RRset Ordering</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            When multiple records are returned in an answer it may be
            useful to configure the order of the records placed into the
            response.
            The <span><strong class="command">rrset-order</strong></span> statement permits
            configuration
            of the ordering of the records in a multiple record response.
            See also the <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span> statement,
            <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#the_sortlist_statement" title="The sortlist Statement">the section called &#8220;The <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span> Statement&#8221;</a>.
          </p>
<p>
            An <span><strong class="command">order_spec</strong></span> is defined as
            follows:
          </p>
<p>
            [<span class="optional">class <em class="replaceable"><code>class_name</code></em></span>]
            [<span class="optional">type <em class="replaceable"><code>type_name</code></em></span>]
            [<span class="optional">name <em class="replaceable"><code>"domain_name"</code></em></span>]
            order <em class="replaceable"><code>ordering</code></em>
          </p>
<p>
            If no class is specified, the default is <span><strong class="command">ANY</strong></span>.
            If no type is specified, the default is <span><strong class="command">ANY</strong></span>.
            If no name is specified, the default is "<span><strong class="command">*</strong></span>" (asterisk).
          </p>
<p>
            The legal values for <span><strong class="command">ordering</strong></span> are:
          </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">fixed</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Records are returned in the order they
                      are defined in the zone file.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">random</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Records are returned in some random order.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">cyclic</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Records are returned in a cyclic round-robin order.
                    </p>
                    <p>
                      If <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> is configured with the
                      "--enable-fixed-rrset" option at compile time, then
                      the initial ordering of the RRset will match the
                      one specified in the zone file.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
            For example:
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">rrset-order {
   class IN type A name "host.example.com" order random;
   order cyclic;
};
</pre>
<p>
            will cause any responses for type A records in class IN that
            have "<code class="literal">host.example.com</code>" as a
            suffix, to always be returned
            in random order. All other records are returned in cyclic order.
          </p>
<p>
            If multiple <span><strong class="command">rrset-order</strong></span> statements
            appear,
            they are not combined &#8212; the last one applies.
          </p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
              In this release of <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9, the
              <span><strong class="command">rrset-order</strong></span> statement does not support
              "fixed" ordering by default.  Fixed ordering can be enabled
              at compile time by specifying "--enable-fixed-rrset" on
              the "configure" command line.
            </p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="tuning"></a>Tuning</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">lame-ttl</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Sets the number of seconds to cache a
                  lame server indication. 0 disables caching. (This is
                  <span class="bold"><strong>NOT</strong></span> recommended.)
                  The default is <code class="literal">600</code> (10 minutes) and the
                  maximum value is
                  <code class="literal">1800</code> (30 minutes).
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-ncache-ttl</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  To reduce network traffic and increase performance,
                  the server stores negative answers. <span><strong class="command">max-ncache-ttl</strong></span> is
                  used to set a maximum retention time for these answers in
                  the server
                  in seconds. The default
                  <span><strong class="command">max-ncache-ttl</strong></span> is <code class="literal">10800</code> seconds (3 hours).
                  <span><strong class="command">max-ncache-ttl</strong></span> cannot exceed
                  7 days and will
                  be silently truncated to 7 days if set to a greater value.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-cache-ttl</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Sets the maximum time for which the server will
                  cache ordinary (positive) answers. The default is
                  one week (7 days).
                  A value of zero may cause all queries to return
                  SERVFAIL, because of lost caches of intermediate
                  RRsets (such as NS and glue AAAA/A records) in the
                  resolution process.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">min-roots</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  The minimum number of root servers that
                  is required for a request for the root servers to be
                  accepted. The default
                  is <strong class="userinput"><code>2</code></strong>.
                </p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
                    Not implemented in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
                  </p>
</div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-validity-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  Specifies the number of days into the future when
                  DNSSEC signatures automatically generated as a
                  result of dynamic updates (<a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#dynamic_update" title="Dynamic Update">the section called &#8220;Dynamic Update&#8221;</a>) will expire.  There
                  is a optional second field which specifies how
                  long before expiry that the signatures will be
                  regenerated.  If not specified the signatures will
                  be regenerated at 1/4 of base interval.  The second
                  field is specified in days if the base interval is
                  greater than 7 days otherwise it is specified in hours.
                  The default base interval is <code class="literal">30</code> days
                  giving a re-signing interval of 7 1/2 days.  The maximum
                  values are 10 years (3660 days).
                </p>
<p>
                  The signature inception time is unconditionally
                  set to one hour before the current time to allow
                  for a limited amount of clock skew.
                </p>
<p>
                  The <span><strong class="command">sig-validity-interval</strong></span>
                  should be, at least, several multiples of the SOA
                  expire interval to allow for reasonable interaction
                  between the various timer and expiry dates.
                </p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-signing-nodes</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specify the maximum number of nodes to be
                  examined in each quantum when signing a zone with
                  a new DNSKEY. The default is
                  <code class="literal">100</code>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-signing-signatures</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specify a threshold number of signatures that
                  will terminate processing a quantum when signing
                  a zone with a new DNSKEY.  The default is
                  <code class="literal">10</code>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-signing-type</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  Specify a private RDATA type to be used when generating
                  key signing records.  The default is
                  <code class="literal">65535</code>.
                </p>
<p>
                  It is expected that this parameter may be removed
                  in a future version once there is a standard type.
                </p>
</dd>
<dt>
<span class="term"><span><strong class="command">min-refresh-time</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-refresh-time</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">min-retry-time</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-retry-time</strong></span></span>
</dt>
<dd>
<p>
                  These options control the server's behavior on refreshing a
                  zone
                  (querying for SOA changes) or retrying failed transfers.
                  Usually the SOA values for the zone are used, but these
                  values
                  are set by the master, giving slave server administrators
                  little
                  control over their contents.
                </p>
<p>
                  These options allow the administrator to set a minimum and
                  maximum
                  refresh and retry time either per-zone, per-view, or
                  globally.
                  These options are valid for slave and stub zones,
                  and clamp the SOA refresh and retry times to the specified
                  values.
                </p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">edns-udp-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Sets the advertised EDNS UDP buffer size in bytes.  Valid
                  values are 512 to 4096 (values outside this range
                  will be silently adjusted).  The default value is
                  4096.  The usual reason for setting edns-udp-size to
                  a non-default value is to get UDP answers to pass
                  through broken firewalls that block fragmented
                  packets and/or block UDP packets that are greater
                  than 512 bytes.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-udp-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Sets the maximum EDNS UDP message size named will
                  send in bytes.  Valid values are 512 to 4096 (values outside
                  this range will be silently adjusted).  The default
                  value is 4096.  The usual reason for setting
                  max-udp-size to a non-default value is to get UDP
                  answers to pass through broken firewalls that
                  block fragmented packets and/or block UDP packets
                  that are greater than 512 bytes.
                  This is independent of the advertised receive
                  buffer (<span><strong class="command">edns-udp-size</strong></span>).
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">masterfile-format</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>Specifies
                  the file format of zone files (see
                  <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zonefile_format" title="Additional File Formats">the section called &#8220;Additional File Formats&#8221;</a>).
                  The default value is <code class="constant">text</code>, which is the
                  standard textual representation.  Files in other formats
                  than <code class="constant">text</code> are typically expected
                  to be generated by the <span><strong class="command">named-compilezone</strong></span> tool.
                  Note that when a zone file in a different format than
                  <code class="constant">text</code> is loaded, <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>
                  may omit some of the checks which would be performed for a
                  file in the <code class="constant">text</code> format.  In particular,
                  <span><strong class="command">check-names</strong></span> checks do not apply
                  for the <code class="constant">raw</code> format.  This means
                  a zone file in the <code class="constant">raw</code> format
                  must be generated with the same check level as that
                  specified in the <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> configuration
                  file.  This statement sets the
                  <span><strong class="command">masterfile-format</strong></span> for all zones,
                  but can be overridden on a per-zone or per-view basis
                  by including a <span><strong class="command">masterfile-format</strong></span>
                  statement within the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> or
                  <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> block in the configuration
                  file.
                </p></dd>
<dt>
<span class="term"><span><strong class="command">clients-per-query</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-clients-per-query</strong></span></span>
</dt>
<dd>
<p>These set the
                  initial value (minimum) and maximum number of recursive
                  simultaneous clients for any given query
                  (&lt;qname,qtype,qclass&gt;) that the server will accept
                  before dropping additional clients.  named will attempt to
                  self tune this value and changes will be logged.  The
                  default values are 10 and 100.
                </p>
<p>
                  This value should reflect how many queries come in for
                  a given name in the time it takes to resolve that name.
                  If the number of queries exceed this value, named will
                  assume that it is dealing with a non-responsive zone
                  and will drop additional queries.  If it gets a response
                  after dropping queries, it will raise the estimate.  The
                  estimate will then be lowered in 20 minutes if it has
                  remained unchanged.
                </p>
<p>
                  If <span><strong class="command">clients-per-query</strong></span> is set to zero,
                  then there is no limit on the number of clients per query
                  and no queries will be dropped.
                </p>
<p>
                  If <span><strong class="command">max-clients-per-query</strong></span> is set to zero,
                  then there is no upper bound other than imposed by
                  <span><strong class="command">recursive-clients</strong></span>.
                </p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-delay</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The delay, in seconds, between sending sets of notify
                  messages for a zone.  The default is zero.
                </p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="builtin"></a>Built-in server information zones</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            The server provides some helpful diagnostic information
            through a number of built-in zones under the
            pseudo-top-level-domain <code class="literal">bind</code> in the
            <span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span> class.  These zones are part
            of a
            built-in view (see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#view_statement_grammar" title="view Statement Grammar">the section called &#8220;<span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> Statement Grammar&#8221;</a>) of
            class
            <span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span> which is separate from the
            default view of
            class <span><strong class="command">IN</strong></span>; therefore, any global
            server options
            such as <span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span> do not apply
            the these zones.
            If you feel the need to disable these zones, use the options
            below, or hide the built-in <span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span>
            view by
            defining an explicit view of class <span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span>
            that matches all clients.
          </p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">version</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The version the server should report
                  via a query of the name <code class="literal">version.bind</code>
                  with type <span><strong class="command">TXT</strong></span>, class <span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span>.
                  The default is the real version number of this server.
                  Specifying <span><strong class="command">version none</strong></span>
                  disables processing of the queries.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">hostname</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The hostname the server should report via a query of
                  the name <code class="filename">hostname.bind</code>
                  with type <span><strong class="command">TXT</strong></span>, class <span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span>.
                  This defaults to the hostname of the machine hosting the
                  name server as
                  found by the gethostname() function.  The primary purpose of such queries
                  is to
                  identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually
                  answering your queries.  Specifying <span><strong class="command">hostname none;</strong></span>
                  disables processing of the queries.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">server-id</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The ID the server should report when receiving a Name
                  Server Identifier (NSID) query, or a query of the name
                  <code class="filename">ID.SERVER</code> with type
                  <span><strong class="command">TXT</strong></span>, class <span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span>.
                  The primary purpose of such queries is to
                  identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually
                  answering your queries.  Specifying <span><strong class="command">server-id none;</strong></span>
                  disables processing of the queries.
                  Specifying <span><strong class="command">server-id hostname;</strong></span> will cause named to
                  use the hostname as found by the gethostname() function.
                  The default <span><strong class="command">server-id</strong></span> is <span><strong class="command">none</strong></span>.
                </p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="empty"></a>Built-in Empty Zones</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            Named has some built-in empty zones (SOA and NS records only).
            These are for zones that should normally be answered locally
            and which queries should not be sent to the Internet's root
            servers.  The official servers which cover these namespaces
            return NXDOMAIN responses to these queries.  In particular,
            these cover the reverse namespace for addresses from RFC 1918 and
            RFC 3330.  They also include the reverse namespace for IPv6 local
            address (locally assigned), IPv6 link local addresses, the IPv6
            loopback address and the IPv6 unknown address.
          </p>
<p>
            Named will attempt to determine if a built in zone already exists
            or is active (covered by a forward-only forwarding declaration)
            and will not create a empty zone in that case.
          </p>
<p>
            The current list of empty zones is:
            </p>
<div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc">
<li>0.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>127.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>254.169.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>2.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>255.255.255.255.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.IP6.ARPA</li>
<li>1.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.IP6.ARPA</li>
<li>D.F.IP6.ARPA</li>
<li>8.E.F.IP6.ARPA</li>
<li>9.E.F.IP6.ARPA</li>
<li>A.E.F.IP6.ARPA</li>
<li>B.E.F.IP6.ARPA</li>
</ul></div>
<p>
          </p>
<p>
            Empty zones are settable at the view level and only apply to
            views of class IN.  Disabled empty zones are only inherited
            from options if there are no disabled empty zones specified
            at the view level.  To override the options list of disabled
            zones, you can disable the root zone at the view level, for example:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
            disable-empty-zone ".";
</pre>
<p>
          </p>
<p>
            If you are using the address ranges covered here, you should
            already have reverse zones covering the addresses you use.
            In practice this appears to not be the case with many queries
            being made to the infrastructure servers for names in these
            spaces.  So many in fact that sacrificial servers were needed
            to be deployed to channel the query load away from the
            infrastructure servers.
          </p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
            The real parent servers for these zones should disable all
            empty zone under the parent zone they serve.  For the real
            root servers, this is all built in empty zones.  This will
            enable them to return referrals to deeper in the tree.
          </div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">empty-server</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specify what server name will appear in the returned
                  SOA record for empty zones.  If none is specified, then
                  the zone's name will be used.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">empty-contact</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Specify what contact name will appear in the returned
                  SOA record for empty zones.  If none is specified, then
                  "." will be used.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">empty-zones-enable</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Enable or disable all empty zones.  By default they
                  are enabled.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">disable-empty-zone</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  Disable individual empty zones.  By default none are
                  disabled.  This option can be specified multiple times.
                </p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="acache"></a>Additional Section Caching</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            The additional section cache, also called <span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span>,
            is an internal cache to improve the response performance of BIND 9.
            When additional section caching is enabled, BIND 9 will
            cache an internal short-cut to the additional section content for
            each answer RR.
            Note that <span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span> is an internal caching
            mechanism of BIND 9, and is not related to the DNS caching
            server function.
          </p>
<p>
            Additional section caching does not change the
            response content (except the RRsets ordering of the additional
            section, see below), but can improve the response performance
            significantly.
            It is particularly effective when BIND 9 acts as an authoritative
            server for a zone that has many delegations with many glue RRs.
          </p>
<p>
            In order to obtain the maximum performance improvement
            from additional section caching, setting
            <span><strong class="command">additional-from-cache</strong></span>
            to <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span> is recommended, since the current
            implementation of <span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span>
            does not short-cut of additional section information from the
            DNS cache data.
          </p>
<p>
            One obvious disadvantage of <span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span> is
            that it requires much more
            memory for the internal cached data.
            Thus, if the response performance does not matter and memory
            consumption is much more critical, the
            <span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span> mechanism can be
            disabled by setting <span><strong class="command">acache-enable</strong></span> to
            <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>.
            It is also possible to specify the upper limit of memory
            consumption
            for acache by using <span><strong class="command">max-acache-size</strong></span>.
          </p>
<p>
            Additional section caching also has a minor effect on the
            RRset ordering in the additional section.
            Without <span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span>,
            <span><strong class="command">cyclic</strong></span> order is effective for the additional
            section as well as the answer and authority sections.
            However, additional section caching fixes the ordering when it
            first caches an RRset for the additional section, and the same
            ordering will be kept in succeeding responses, regardless of the
            setting of <span><strong class="command">rrset-order</strong></span>.
            The effect of this should be minor, however, since an
            RRset in the additional section
            typically only contains a small number of RRs (and in many cases
            it only contains a single RR), in which case the
            ordering does not matter much.
          </p>
<p>
            The following is a summary of options related to
            <span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span>.
          </p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">acache-enable</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  If <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>, additional section caching is
                  enabled.  The default value is <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">acache-cleaning-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The server will remove stale cache entries, based on an LRU
                  based
                  algorithm, every <span><strong class="command">acache-cleaning-interval</strong></span> minutes.
                  The default is 60 minutes.
                  If set to 0, no periodic cleaning will occur.
                </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-acache-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                  The maximum amount of memory in bytes to use for the server's acache.
                  When the amount of data in the acache reaches this limit,
                  the server
                  will clean more aggressively so that the limit is not
                  exceeded.
                  In a server with multiple views, the limit applies
                  separately to the
                  acache of each view.
                  The default is <code class="literal">16M</code>.
                </p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="statschannels"></a><span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> {
   [ inet ( ip_addr | * ) [ port ip_port ] [allow { <em class="replaceable"><code> address_match_list </code></em> } ]; ]
   [ inet ...; ]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2585469"></a><span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> Statement Definition and
            Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
          The <span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> statement
          declares communication channels to be used by system
          administrators to get access to statistics information of
          the name server.
        </p>
<p>
          This statement intends to be flexible to support multiple
          communication protocols in the future, but currently only
          HTTP access is supported.
          It requires that BIND 9 be compiled with libxml2;
          the <span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> statement is
          still accepted even if it is built without the library,
          but any HTTP access will fail with an error.
        </p>
<p>
          An <span><strong class="command">inet</strong></span> control channel is a TCP socket
          listening at the specified <span><strong class="command">ip_port</strong></span> on the
          specified <span><strong class="command">ip_addr</strong></span>, which can be an IPv4 or IPv6
          address.  An <span><strong class="command">ip_addr</strong></span> of <code class="literal">*</code> (asterisk) is
          interpreted as the IPv4 wildcard address; connections will be
          accepted on any of the system's IPv4 addresses.
          To listen on the IPv6 wildcard address,
          use an <span><strong class="command">ip_addr</strong></span> of <code class="literal">::</code>.
        </p>
<p>
          If no port is specified, port 80 is used for HTTP channels.
          The asterisk "<code class="literal">*</code>" cannot be used for
          <span><strong class="command">ip_port</strong></span>.
        </p>
<p>
          The attempt of opening a statistics channel is
          restricted by the optional <span><strong class="command">allow</strong></span> clause.
          Connections to the statistics channel are permitted based on the
          <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span>.
          If no <span><strong class="command">allow</strong></span> clause is present,
          <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> accepts connection
          attempts from any address; since the statistics may
          contain sensitive internal information, it is highly
          recommended to restrict the source of connection requests
          appropriately.
        </p>
<p>
          If no <span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> statement is present,
          <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will not open any communication channels.
        </p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="server_statement_grammar"></a><span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr[/prefixlen]</code></em> {
    [<span class="optional"> bogus <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> provide-ixfr <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> request-ixfr <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> edns <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> edns-udp-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-udp-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfers <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfer-format <em class="replaceable"><code>( one-answer | many-answers )</code></em> ; ]</span>]
    [<span class="optional"> keys <em class="replaceable"><code>{ string ; [<span class="optional"> string ; [<span class="optional">...</span>]</span>] }</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> query-source [<span class="optional"> address ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>] [<span class="optional"> port ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>]; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> query-source-v6 [<span class="optional"> address ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>] [<span class="optional"> port ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>]; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> use-queryport-pool <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> queryport-pool-ports <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> queryport-pool-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="server_statement_definition_and_usage"></a><span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Definition and
            Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> statement defines
            characteristics
            to be associated with a remote name server.  If a prefix length is
            specified, then a range of servers is covered.  Only the most
            specific
            server clause applies regardless of the order in
            <code class="filename">named.conf</code>.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> statement can occur at
            the top level of the
            configuration file or inside a <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>
            statement.
            If a <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statement contains
            one or more <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> statements, only
            those
            apply to the view and any top-level ones are ignored.
            If a view contains no <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span>
            statements,
            any top-level <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> statements are
            used as
            defaults.
          </p>
<p>
            If you discover that a remote server is giving out bad data,
            marking it as bogus will prevent further queries to it. The
            default
            value of <span><strong class="command">bogus</strong></span> is <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span> clause determines
            whether
            the local server, acting as master, will respond with an
            incremental
            zone transfer when the given remote server, a slave, requests it.
            If set to <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>, incremental transfer
            will be provided
            whenever possible. If set to <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>,
            all transfers
            to the remote server will be non-incremental. If not set, the
            value
            of the <span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span> option in the
            view or
            global options block is used as a default.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">request-ixfr</strong></span> clause determines
            whether
            the local server, acting as a slave, will request incremental zone
            transfers from the given remote server, a master. If not set, the
            value of the <span><strong class="command">request-ixfr</strong></span> option in
            the view or
            global options block is used as a default.
          </p>
<p>
            IXFR requests to servers that do not support IXFR will
            automatically
            fall back to AXFR.  Therefore, there is no need to manually list
            which servers support IXFR and which ones do not; the global
            default
            of <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span> should always work.
            The purpose of the <span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span> and
            <span><strong class="command">request-ixfr</strong></span> clauses is
            to make it possible to disable the use of IXFR even when both
            master
            and slave claim to support it, for example if one of the servers
            is buggy and crashes or corrupts data when IXFR is used.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">edns</strong></span> clause determines whether
            the local server will attempt to use EDNS when communicating
            with the remote server.  The default is <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">edns-udp-size</strong></span> option sets the EDNS UDP size
            that is advertised by named when querying the remote server.
            Valid values are 512 to 4096 bytes (values outside this range will be
            silently adjusted).  This option is useful when you wish to
            advertises a different value to this server than the value you
            advertise globally, for example, when there is a firewall at the
            remote site that is blocking large replies.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">max-udp-size</strong></span> option sets the
            maximum EDNS UDP message size named will send.  Valid
            values are 512 to 4096 bytes (values outside this range will
            be silently adjusted).  This option is useful when you
            know that there is a firewall that is blocking large
            replies from named.
          </p>
<p>
            The server supports two zone transfer methods. The first, <span><strong class="command">one-answer</strong></span>,
            uses one DNS message per resource record transferred. <span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span> packs
            as many resource records as possible into a message. <span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span> is
            more efficient, but is only known to be understood by <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9, <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
            8.x, and patched versions of <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
            4.9.5. You can specify which method
            to use for a server with the <span><strong class="command">transfer-format</strong></span> option.
            If <span><strong class="command">transfer-format</strong></span> is not
            specified, the <span><strong class="command">transfer-format</strong></span>
            specified
            by the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statement will be
            used.
          </p>
<p><span><strong class="command">transfers</strong></span>
            is used to limit the number of concurrent inbound zone
            transfers from the specified server. If no
            <span><strong class="command">transfers</strong></span> clause is specified, the
            limit is set according to the
            <span><strong class="command">transfers-per-ns</strong></span> option.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">keys</strong></span> clause identifies a
            <span><strong class="command">key_id</strong></span> defined by the <span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> statement,
            to be used for transaction security (TSIG, <a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#tsig" title="TSIG">the section called &#8220;TSIG&#8221;</a>)
            when talking to the remote server.
            When a request is sent to the remote server, a request signature
            will be generated using the key specified here and appended to the
            message. A request originating from the remote server is not
            required
            to be signed by this key.
          </p>
<p>
            Although the grammar of the <span><strong class="command">keys</strong></span>
            clause
            allows for multiple keys, only a single key per server is
            currently
            supported.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> and
            <span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span> clauses specify
            the IPv4 and IPv6 source
            address to be used for zone transfer with the remote server,
            respectively.
            For an IPv4 remote server, only <span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> can
            be specified.
            Similarly, for an IPv6 remote server, only
            <span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span> can be
            specified.
            For more details, see the description of
            <span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> and
            <span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span> in
            <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called &#8220;Zone Transfers&#8221;</a>.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span> and
            <span><strong class="command">notify-source-v6</strong></span> clauses specify the
            IPv4 and IPv6 source address to be used for notify
            messages sent to remote servers, respectively.  For an
            IPv4 remote server, only <span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span>
            can be specified.  Similarly, for an IPv6 remote server,
            only <span><strong class="command">notify-source-v6</strong></span> can be specified.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">query-source</strong></span> and
            <span><strong class="command">query-source-v6</strong></span> clauses specify the
            IPv4 and IPv6 source address to be used for queries
            sent to remote servers, respectively.  For an IPv4
            remote server, only <span><strong class="command">query-source</strong></span> can
            be specified.  Similarly, for an IPv6 remote server,
            only <span><strong class="command">query-source-v6</strong></span> can be specified.
          </p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2586153"></a><span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> {
    <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ;
    [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; [<span class="optional">...</span>]</span>]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2586204"></a><span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> Statement Definition
            and Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> statement defines
            DNSSEC security roots. DNSSEC is described in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#DNSSEC" title="DNSSEC">the section called &#8220;DNSSEC&#8221;</a>. A security root is defined when the
            public key for a non-authoritative zone is known, but
            cannot be securely obtained through DNS, either because
            it is the DNS root zone or because its parent zone is
            unsigned.  Once a key has been configured as a trusted
            key, it is treated as if it had been validated and
            proven secure. The resolver attempts DNSSEC validation
            on all DNS data in subdomains of a security root.
          </p>
<p>
            All keys (and corresponding zones) listed in
            <span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> are deemed to exist regardless
            of what parent zones say.  Similarly for all keys listed in
            <span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> only those keys are
            used to validate the DNSKEY RRset.  The parent's DS RRset
            will not be used.
          </p>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> statement can contain
            multiple key entries, each consisting of the key's
            domain name, flags, protocol, algorithm, and the Base-64
            representation of the key data.
            Spaces, tabs, newlines and carriage returns are ignored
            in the key data, so the configuration may be split up into
            multiple lines.
          </p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="view_statement_grammar"></a><span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>view_name</code></em>
      [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
      match-clients { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> };
      match-destinations { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> };
      match-recursive-only <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ;
      [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>view_option</code></em>; ...</span>]
      [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_statement</code></em>; ...</span>]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2586423"></a><span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statement is a powerful
            feature
            of <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 that lets a name server
            answer a DNS query differently
            depending on who is asking. It is particularly useful for
            implementing
            split DNS setups without having to run multiple servers.
          </p>
<p>
            Each <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statement defines a view
            of the
            DNS namespace that will be seen by a subset of clients.  A client
            matches
            a view if its source IP address matches the
            <code class="varname">address_match_list</code> of the view's
            <span><strong class="command">match-clients</strong></span> clause and its
            destination IP address matches
            the <code class="varname">address_match_list</code> of the
            view's
            <span><strong class="command">match-destinations</strong></span> clause.  If not
            specified, both
            <span><strong class="command">match-clients</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">match-destinations</strong></span>
            default to matching all addresses.  In addition to checking IP
            addresses
            <span><strong class="command">match-clients</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">match-destinations</strong></span>
            can also take <span><strong class="command">keys</strong></span> which provide an
            mechanism for the
            client to select the view.  A view can also be specified
            as <span><strong class="command">match-recursive-only</strong></span>, which
            means that only recursive
            requests from matching clients will match that view.
            The order of the <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statements is
            significant &#8212;
            a client request will be resolved in the context of the first
            <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> that it matches.
          </p>
<p>
            Zones defined within a <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>
            statement will
            only be accessible to clients that match the <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>.
            By defining a zone of the same name in multiple views, different
            zone data can be given to different clients, for example,
            "internal"
            and "external" clients in a split DNS setup.
          </p>
<p>
            Many of the options given in the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statement
            can also be used within a <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>
            statement, and then
            apply only when resolving queries with that view.  When no
            view-specific
            value is given, the value in the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statement
            is used as a default.  Also, zone options can have default values
            specified
            in the <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statement; these
            view-specific defaults
            take precedence over those in the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statement.
          </p>
<p>
            Views are class specific.  If no class is given, class IN
            is assumed.  Note that all non-IN views must contain a hint zone,
            since only the IN class has compiled-in default hints.
          </p>
<p>
            If there are no <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statements in
            the config
            file, a default view that matches any client is automatically
            created
            in class IN. Any <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> statements
            specified on
            the top level of the configuration file are considered to be part
            of
            this default view, and the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span>
            statement will
            apply to the default view. If any explicit <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>
            statements are present, all <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
            statements must
            occur inside <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statements.
          </p>
<p>
            Here is an example of a typical split DNS setup implemented
            using <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statements:
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">view "internal" {
      // This should match our internal networks.
      match-clients { 10.0.0.0/8; };

      // Provide recursive service to internal clients only.
      recursion yes;

      // Provide a complete view of the example.com zone
      // including addresses of internal hosts.
      zone "example.com" {
            type master;
            file "example-internal.db";
      };
};

view "external" {
      // Match all clients not matched by the previous view.
      match-clients { any; };

      // Refuse recursive service to external clients.
      recursion no;

      // Provide a restricted view of the example.com zone
      // containing only publicly accessible hosts.
      zone "example.com" {
           type master;
           file "example-external.db";
      };
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="zone_statement_grammar"></a><span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
            Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
    type master;
    [<span class="optional"> allow-query { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-query-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-transfer { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-update { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> update-policy { <em class="replaceable"><code>update_policy_rule</code></em> [<span class="optional">...</span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> also-notify { <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-names (<code class="constant">warn</code>|<code class="constant">fail</code>|<code class="constant">ignore</code>) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-mx (<code class="constant">warn</code>|<code class="constant">fail</code>|<code class="constant">ignore</code>) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-wildcard <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-integrity <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> dialup <em class="replaceable"><code>dialup_option</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> file <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> masterfile-format (<code class="constant">text</code>|<code class="constant">raw</code>) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> journal <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-journal-size <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> forward (<code class="constant">only</code>|<code class="constant">first</code>) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> forwarders { [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> ixfr-base <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> ixfr-from-differences <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> ixfr-tmp-file <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> maintain-ixfr-base <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-ixfr-log-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-transfer-idle-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-transfer-time-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>explicit</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>master-only</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-delay <em class="replaceable"><code>seconds</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-to-soa <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> pubkey <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> zone-statistics <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> sig-validity-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> sig-signing-nodes <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> sig-signing-signatures <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> sig-signing-type <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> database <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> min-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> min-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> key-directory <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> zero-no-soa-ttl <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
};

zone <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
    type slave;
    [<span class="optional"> allow-notify { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-query { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-query-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-transfer { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-update-forwarding { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> update-check-ksk <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> try-tcp-refresh <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> also-notify { <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-names (<code class="constant">warn</code>|<code class="constant">fail</code>|<code class="constant">ignore</code>) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> dialup <em class="replaceable"><code>dialup_option</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> file <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> masterfile-format (<code class="constant">text</code>|<code class="constant">raw</code>) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> journal <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-journal-size <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> forward (<code class="constant">only</code>|<code class="constant">first</code>) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> forwarders { [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> ixfr-base <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> ixfr-from-differences <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> ixfr-tmp-file <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> maintain-ixfr-base <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> masters [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] { ( <em class="replaceable"><code>masters_list</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] [<span class="optional">key <em class="replaceable"><code>key</code></em></span>] ) ; [<span class="optional">...</span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-ixfr-log-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-transfer-idle-in <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-transfer-idle-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-transfer-time-in <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-transfer-time-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>explicit</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>master-only</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-delay <em class="replaceable"><code>seconds</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-to-soa <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> pubkey <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> alt-transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> alt-transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> use-alt-transfer-source <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> notify-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> zone-statistics <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> database <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> min-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> min-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> multi-master <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> zero-no-soa-ttl <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
};

zone <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
    type hint;
    file <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ;
    [<span class="optional"> delegation-only <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-names (<code class="constant">warn</code>|<code class="constant">fail</code>|<code class="constant">ignore</code>) ; // Not Implemented. </span>]
};

zone <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
    type stub;
    [<span class="optional"> allow-query { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> allow-query-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> check-names (<code class="constant">warn</code>|<code class="constant">fail</code>|<code class="constant">ignore</code>) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> dialup <em class="replaceable"><code>dialup_option</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> delegation-only <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> file <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> masterfile-format (<code class="constant">text</code>|<code class="constant">raw</code>) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> forward (<code class="constant">only</code>|<code class="constant">first</code>) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> forwarders { [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> masters [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] { ( <em class="replaceable"><code>masters_list</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] [<span class="optional">key <em class="replaceable"><code>key</code></em></span>] ) ; [<span class="optional">...</span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-transfer-idle-in <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-transfer-time-in <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> pubkey <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> alt-transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> alt-transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> use-alt-transfer-source <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> zone-statistics <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> database <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> min-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> min-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> max-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> multi-master <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
};

zone <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
    type forward;
    [<span class="optional"> forward (<code class="constant">only</code>|<code class="constant">first</code>) ; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> forwarders { [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
    [<span class="optional"> delegation-only <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
};

zone <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
    type delegation-only;
};

</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2587892"></a><span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2587899"></a>Zone Types</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">master</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        The server has a master copy of the data
                        for the zone and will be able to provide authoritative
                        answers for
                        it.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">slave</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        A slave zone is a replica of a master
                        zone. The <span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> list
                        specifies one or more IP addresses
                        of master servers that the slave contacts to update
                        its copy of the zone.
                        Masters list elements can also be names of other
                        masters lists.
                        By default, transfers are made from port 53 on the
                        servers; this can
                        be changed for all servers by specifying a port number
                        before the
                        list of IP addresses, or on a per-server basis after
                        the IP address.
                        Authentication to the master can also be done with
                        per-server TSIG keys.
                        If a file is specified, then the
                        replica will be written to this file whenever the zone
                        is changed,
                        and reloaded from this file on a server restart. Use
                        of a file is
                        recommended, since it often speeds server startup and
                        eliminates
                        a needless waste of bandwidth. Note that for large
                        numbers (in the
                        tens or hundreds of thousands) of zones per server, it
                        is best to
                        use a two-level naming scheme for zone filenames. For
                        example,
                        a slave server for the zone <code class="literal">example.com</code> might place
                        the zone contents into a file called
                        <code class="filename">ex/example.com</code> where <code class="filename">ex/</code> is
                        just the first two letters of the zone name. (Most
                        operating systems
                        behave very slowly if you put 100 000 files into
                        a single directory.)
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">stub</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        A stub zone is similar to a slave zone,
                        except that it replicates only the NS records of a
                        master zone instead
                        of the entire zone. Stub zones are not a standard part
                        of the DNS;
                        they are a feature specific to the <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> implementation.
                      </p>

                      <p>
                        Stub zones can be used to eliminate the need for glue
                        NS record
                        in a parent zone at the expense of maintaining a stub
                        zone entry and
                        a set of name server addresses in <code class="filename">named.conf</code>.
                        This usage is not recommended for new configurations,
                        and BIND 9
                        supports it only in a limited way.
                        In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 4/8, zone
                        transfers of a parent zone
                        included the NS records from stub children of that
                        zone. This meant
                        that, in some cases, users could get away with
                        configuring child stubs
                        only in the master server for the parent zone. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
                        9 never mixes together zone data from different zones
                        in this
                        way. Therefore, if a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 master serving a parent
                        zone has child stub zones configured, all the slave
                        servers for the
                        parent zone also need to have the same child stub
                        zones
                        configured.
                      </p>

                      <p>
                        Stub zones can also be used as a way of forcing the
                        resolution
                        of a given domain to use a particular set of
                        authoritative servers.
                        For example, the caching name servers on a private
                        network using
                        RFC1918 addressing may be configured with stub zones
                        for
                        <code class="literal">10.in-addr.arpa</code>
                        to use a set of internal name servers as the
                        authoritative
                        servers for that domain.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">forward</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        A "forward zone" is a way to configure
                        forwarding on a per-domain basis.  A <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> statement
                        of type <span><strong class="command">forward</strong></span> can
                        contain a <span><strong class="command">forward</strong></span>
                        and/or <span><strong class="command">forwarders</strong></span>
                        statement,
                        which will apply to queries within the domain given by
                        the zone
                        name. If no <span><strong class="command">forwarders</strong></span>
                        statement is present or
                        an empty list for <span><strong class="command">forwarders</strong></span> is given, then no
                        forwarding will be done for the domain, canceling the
                        effects of
                        any forwarders in the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statement. Thus
                        if you want to use this type of zone to change the
                        behavior of the
                        global <span><strong class="command">forward</strong></span> option
                        (that is, "forward first"
                        to, then "forward only", or vice versa, but want to
                        use the same
                        servers as set globally) you need to re-specify the
                        global forwarders.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">hint</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        The initial set of root name servers is
                        specified using a "hint zone". When the server starts
                        up, it uses
                        the root hints to find a root name server and get the
                        most recent
                        list of root name servers. If no hint zone is
                        specified for class
                        IN, the server uses a compiled-in default set of root
                        servers hints.
                        Classes other than IN have no built-in defaults hints.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">delegation-only</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        This is used to enforce the delegation-only
                        status of infrastructure zones (e.g. COM, NET, ORG).
                        Any answer that
                        is received without an explicit or implicit delegation
                        in the authority
                        section will be treated as NXDOMAIN.  This does not
                        apply to the zone
                        apex.  This should not be applied to leaf zones.
                      </p>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">delegation-only</code> has no
                        effect on answers received
                        from forwarders.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2588250"></a>Class</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
              The zone's name may optionally be followed by a class. If
              a class is not specified, class <code class="literal">IN</code> (for <code class="varname">Internet</code>),
              is assumed. This is correct for the vast majority of cases.
            </p>
<p>
              The <code class="literal">hesiod</code> class is
              named for an information service from MIT's Project Athena. It
              is
              used to share information about various systems databases, such
              as users, groups, printers and so on. The keyword
              <code class="literal">HS</code> is
              a synonym for hesiod.
            </p>
<p>
              Another MIT development is Chaosnet, a LAN protocol created
              in the mid-1970s. Zone data for it can be specified with the <code class="literal">CHAOS</code> class.
            </p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2588352"></a>Zone Options</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-notify</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">allow-notify</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#access_control" title="Access Control">the section called &#8220;Access Control&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#access_control" title="Access Control">the section called &#8220;Access Control&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-query-on</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">allow-query-on</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#access_control" title="Access Control">the section called &#8220;Access Control&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-transfer</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of <span><strong class="command">allow-transfer</strong></span>
                    in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#access_control" title="Access Control">the section called &#8220;Access Control&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of <span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span>
                    in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#access_control" title="Access Control">the section called &#8220;Access Control&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    Specifies a "Simple Secure Update" policy. See
                    <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#dynamic_update_policies" title="Dynamic Update Policies">the section called &#8220;Dynamic Update Policies&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-update-forwarding</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of <span><strong class="command">allow-update-forwarding</strong></span>
                    in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#access_control" title="Access Control">the section called &#8220;Access Control&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    Only meaningful if <span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span>
                    is
                    active for this zone. The set of machines that will
                    receive a
                    <code class="literal">DNS NOTIFY</code> message
                    for this zone is made up of all the listed name servers
                    (other than
                    the primary master) for the zone plus any IP addresses
                    specified
                    with <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span>. A port
                    may be specified
                    with each <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span>
                    address to send the notify
                    messages to a port other than the default of 53.
                    <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span> is not
                    meaningful for stub zones.
                    The default is the empty list.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-names</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    This option is used to restrict the character set and
                    syntax of
                    certain domain names in master files and/or DNS responses
                    received from the
                    network.  The default varies according to zone type.  For <span><strong class="command">master</strong></span> zones the default is <span><strong class="command">fail</strong></span>.  For <span><strong class="command">slave</strong></span>
                    zones the default is <span><strong class="command">warn</strong></span>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-mx</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">check-mx</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called &#8220;Boolean Options&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-wildcard</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">check-wildcard</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called &#8220;Boolean Options&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-integrity</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">check-integrity</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called &#8220;Boolean Options&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-sibling</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">check-sibling</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called &#8220;Boolean Options&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">zero-no-soa-ttl</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">zero-no-soa-ttl</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called &#8220;Boolean Options&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">update-check-ksk</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">update-check-ksk</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called &#8220;Boolean Options&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">try-tcp-refresh</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">try-tcp-refresh</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called &#8220;Boolean Options&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">database</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
                    Specify the type of database to be used for storing the
                    zone data.  The string following the <span><strong class="command">database</strong></span> keyword
                    is interpreted as a list of whitespace-delimited words.
                    The first word
                    identifies the database type, and any subsequent words are
                    passed
                    as arguments to the database to be interpreted in a way
                    specific
                    to the database type.
                  </p>
<p>
                    The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>"rbt"</code></strong>, BIND 9's
                    native in-memory
                    red-black-tree database.  This database does not take
                    arguments.
                  </p>
<p>
                    Other values are possible if additional database drivers
                    have been linked into the server.  Some sample drivers are
                    included
                    with the distribution but none are linked in by default.
                  </p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called &#8220;Boolean Options&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">delegation-only</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    The flag only applies to hint and stub zones.  If set
                    to <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, then the zone will also be
                    treated as if it
                    is also a delegation-only type zone.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">forward</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    Only meaningful if the zone has a forwarders
                    list. The <span><strong class="command">only</strong></span> value causes
                    the lookup to fail
                    after trying the forwarders and getting no answer, while <span><strong class="command">first</strong></span> would
                    allow a normal lookup to be tried.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">forwarders</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    Used to override the list of global forwarders.
                    If it is not specified in a zone of type <span><strong class="command">forward</strong></span>,
                    no forwarding is done for the zone and the global options are
                    not used.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">ixfr-base</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    Was used in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 to
                    specify the name
                    of the transaction log (journal) file for dynamic update
                    and IXFR.
                    <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 ignores the option
                    and constructs the name of the journal
                    file by appending "<code class="filename">.jnl</code>"
                    to the name of the
                    zone file.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">ixfr-tmp-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    Was an undocumented option in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8.
                    Ignored in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">journal</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    Allow the default journal's filename to be overridden.
                    The default is the zone's filename with "<code class="filename">.jnl</code>" appended.
                    This is applicable to <span><strong class="command">master</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">slave</strong></span> zones.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-journal-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">max-journal-size</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#server_resource_limits" title="Server  Resource Limits">the section called &#8220;Server  Resource Limits&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-time-in</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">max-transfer-time-in</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called &#8220;Zone Transfers&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-idle-in</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">max-transfer-idle-in</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called &#8220;Zone Transfers&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-time-out</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">max-transfer-time-out</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called &#8220;Zone Transfers&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-idle-out</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">max-transfer-idle-out</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called &#8220;Zone Transfers&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called &#8220;Boolean Options&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-delay</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">notify-delay</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called &#8220;Tuning&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-to-soa</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">notify-to-soa</strong></span> in
                    <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called &#8220;Boolean Options&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">pubkey</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8, this option was
                    intended for specifying
                    a public zone key for verification of signatures in DNSSEC
                    signed
                    zones when they are loaded from disk. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 does not verify signatures
                    on load and ignores the option.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">zone-statistics</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, the server will keep
                    statistical
                    information for this zone, which can be dumped to the
                    <span><strong class="command">statistics-file</strong></span> defined in
                    the server options.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-validity-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">sig-validity-interval</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called &#8220;Tuning&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-signing-nodes</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">sig-signing-nodes</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called &#8220;Tuning&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-signing-signatures</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">sig-signing-signatures</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called &#8220;Tuning&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-signing-type</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">sig-signing-type</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called &#8220;Tuning&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called &#8220;Zone Transfers&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called &#8220;Zone Transfers&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">alt-transfer-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">alt-transfer-source</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called &#8220;Zone Transfers&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">alt-transfer-source-v6</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">alt-transfer-source-v6</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called &#8220;Zone Transfers&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">use-alt-transfer-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">use-alt-transfer-source</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called &#8220;Zone Transfers&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called &#8220;Zone Transfers&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-source-v6</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">notify-source-v6</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called &#8220;Zone Transfers&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt>
<span class="term"><span><strong class="command">min-refresh-time</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-refresh-time</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">min-retry-time</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-retry-time</strong></span></span>
</dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called &#8220;Tuning&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">ixfr-from-differences</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">ixfr-from-differences</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called &#8220;Boolean Options&#8221;</a>.
                    (Note that the <span><strong class="command">ixfr-from-differences</strong></span>
                    <strong class="userinput"><code>master</code></strong> and
                    <strong class="userinput"><code>slave</code></strong> choices are not
                    available at the zone level.)
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">key-directory</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of
                    <span><strong class="command">key-directory</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#options" title="options Statement Definition and
          Usage">the section called &#8220;<span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> Statement Definition and
          Usage&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">multi-master</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of <span><strong class="command">multi-master</strong></span> in
                    <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called &#8220;Boolean Options&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">masterfile-format</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    See the description of <span><strong class="command">masterfile-format</strong></span>
                    in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called &#8220;Tuning&#8221;</a>.
                  </p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="dynamic_update_policies"></a>Dynamic Update Policies</h4></div></div></div>
<p><acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 supports two alternative
              methods of granting clients the right to perform
              dynamic updates to a zone, configured by the
              <span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span> and
              <span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span> option, respectively.
            </p>
<p>
              The <span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span> clause works the
              same way as in previous versions of <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>.
              It grants given clients the permission to update any
              record of any name in the zone.
            </p>
<p>
              The <span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span> clause is new
              in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 and allows more fine-grained
              control over what updates are allowed.  A set of rules
              is specified, where each rule either grants or denies
              permissions for one or more names to be updated by
              one or more identities.  If the dynamic update request
              message is signed (that is, it includes either a TSIG
              or SIG(0) record), the identity of the signer can be
              determined.
            </p>
<p>
              Rules are specified in the <span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span>
              zone option, and are only meaningful for master zones.
              When the <span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span> statement
              is present, it is a configuration error for the
              <span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span> statement to be
              present.  The <span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span> statement
              only examines the signer of a message; the source
              address is not relevant.
            </p>
<p>
              This is how a rule definition looks:
            </p>
<pre class="programlisting">
( <span><strong class="command">grant</strong></span> | <span><strong class="command">deny</strong></span> ) <em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>nametype</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>types</code></em> </span>]
</pre>
<p>
              Each rule grants or denies privileges.  Once a message has
              successfully matched a rule, the operation is immediately
              granted
              or denied and no further rules are examined.  A rule is matched
              when the signer matches the identity field, the name matches the
              name field in accordance with the nametype field, and the type
              matches
              the types specified in the type field.
            </p>
<p>
              No signer is required for <em class="replaceable"><code>tcp-self</code></em>
              or <em class="replaceable"><code>6to4-self</code></em> however the standard
              reverse mapping / prefix conversion must match the identity
              field.
            </p>
<p>
              The identity field specifies a name or a wildcard
              name.  Normally, this is the name of the TSIG or
              SIG(0) key used to sign the update request.  When a
              TKEY exchange has been used to create a shared secret,
              the identity of the shared secret is the same as the
              identity of the key used to authenticate the TKEY
              exchange.  TKEY is also the negotiation method used
              by GSS-TSIG, which establishes an identity that is
              the Kerberos principal of the client, such as
              <strong class="userinput"><code>"user@host.domain"</code></strong>.  When the
              <em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em> field specifies
              a wildcard name, it is subject to DNS wildcard
              expansion, so the rule will apply to multiple identities.
              The <em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em> field must
              contain a fully-qualified domain name.
            </p>
<p>
              The <em class="replaceable"><code>nametype</code></em> field has 12
              values:
              <code class="varname">name</code>, <code class="varname">subdomain</code>,
              <code class="varname">wildcard</code>, <code class="varname">self</code>,
              <code class="varname">selfsub</code>, <code class="varname">selfwild</code>,
              <code class="varname">krb5-self</code>, <code class="varname">ms-self</code>,
              <code class="varname">krb5-subdomain</code>,
              <code class="varname">ms-subdomain</code>,
              <code class="varname">tcp-self</code> and <code class="varname">6to4-self</code>.
            </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">name</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Exact-match semantics.  This rule matches
                        when the name being updated is identical
                        to the contents of the
                        <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> field.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">subdomain</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        This rule matches when the name being updated
                        is a subdomain of, or identical to, the
                        contents of the <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em>
                        field.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">wildcard</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        The <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> field
                        is subject to DNS wildcard expansion, and
                        this rule matches when the name being updated
                        name is a valid expansion of the wildcard.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">self</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        This rule matches when the name being updated
                        matches the contents of the
                        <em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em> field.
                        The <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> field
                        is ignored, but should be the same as the
                        <em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em> field.
                        The <code class="varname">self</code> nametype is
                        most useful when allowing using one key per
                        name to update, where the key has the same
                        name as the name to be updated.  The
                        <em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em> would
                        be specified as <code class="constant">*</code> (an asterisk) in
                        this case.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">selfsub</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        This rule is similar to <code class="varname">self</code>
                        except that subdomains of <code class="varname">self</code>
                        can also be updated.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">selfwild</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        This rule is similar to <code class="varname">self</code>
                        except that only subdomains of
                        <code class="varname">self</code> can be updated.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">tcp-self</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Allow updates that have been sent via TCP and
                        for which the standard mapping from the initiating
                        IP address into the IN-ADDR.ARPA and IP6.ARPA
                        namespaces match the name to be updated.
                      </p>
                      <div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
                        It is theoretically possible to spoof these TCP
                        sessions.
                      </div>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="varname">6to4-self</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Allow the 6to4 prefix to be update by any TCP
                        conection from the 6to4 network or from the
                        corresponding IPv4 address.  This is intended
                        to allow NS or DNAME RRsets to be added to the
                        reverse tree.
                      </p>
                      <div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
                        It is theoretically possible to spoof these TCP
                        sessions.
                      </div>
                    </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
              In all cases, the <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em>
              field must
              specify a fully-qualified domain name.
            </p>
<p>
              If no types are explicitly specified, this rule matches
              all types except RRSIG, NS, SOA, NSEC and NSEC3. Types
              may be specified by name, including "ANY" (ANY matches
              all types except NSEC and NSEC3, which can never be
              updated).  Note that when an attempt is made to delete
              all records associated with a name, the rules are
              checked for each existing record type.
            </p>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
<a name="id2590422"></a>Zone File</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="types_of_resource_records_and_when_to_use_them"></a>Types of Resource Records and When to Use Them</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
            This section, largely borrowed from RFC 1034, describes the
            concept of a Resource Record (RR) and explains when each is used.
            Since the publication of RFC 1034, several new RRs have been
            identified
            and implemented in the DNS. These are also included.
          </p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2590440"></a>Resource Records</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
              A domain name identifies a node.  Each node has a set of
              resource information, which may be empty.  The set of resource
              information associated with a particular name is composed of
              separate RRs. The order of RRs in a set is not significant and
              need not be preserved by name servers, resolvers, or other
              parts of the DNS. However, sorting of multiple RRs is
              permitted for optimization purposes, for example, to specify
              that a particular nearby server be tried first. See <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#the_sortlist_statement" title="The sortlist Statement">the section called &#8220;The <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span> Statement&#8221;</a> and <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#rrset_ordering" title="RRset Ordering">the section called &#8220;RRset Ordering&#8221;</a>.
            </p>
<p>
              The components of a Resource Record are:
            </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        owner name
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        The domain name where the RR is found.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        type
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        An encoded 16-bit value that specifies
                        the type of the resource record.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        TTL
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        The time-to-live of the RR. This field
                        is a 32-bit integer in units of seconds, and is
                        primarily used by
                        resolvers when they cache RRs. The TTL describes how
                        long a RR can
                        be cached before it should be discarded.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        class
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        An encoded 16-bit value that identifies
                        a protocol family or instance of a protocol.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        RDATA
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        The resource data.  The format of the
                        data is type (and sometimes class) specific.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
              The following are <span class="emphasis"><em>types</em></span> of valid RRs:
            </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        A
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        A host address.  In the IN class, this is a
                        32-bit IP address.  Described in RFC 1035.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        AAAA
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv6 address.  Described in RFC 1886.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        A6
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv6 address.  This can be a partial
                        address (a suffix) and an indirection to the name
                        where the rest of the
                        address (the prefix) can be found.  Experimental.
                        Described in RFC 2874.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        AFSDB
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Location of AFS database servers.
                        Experimental.  Described in RFC 1183.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        APL
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Address prefix list.  Experimental.
                        Described in RFC 3123.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        CERT
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Holds a digital certificate.
                        Described in RFC 2538.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        CNAME
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Identifies the canonical name of an alias.
                        Described in RFC 1035.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        DHCID
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Is used for identifying which DHCP client is
                        associated with this name.  Described in RFC 4701.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        DNAME
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Replaces the domain name specified with
                        another name to be looked up, effectively aliasing an
                        entire
                        subtree of the domain name space rather than a single
                        record
                        as in the case of the CNAME RR.
                        Described in RFC 2672.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        DNSKEY
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Stores a public key associated with a signed
                        DNS zone.  Described in RFC 4034.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        DS
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Stores the hash of a public key associated with a
                        signed DNS zone.  Described in RFC 4034.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        GPOS
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Specifies the global position.  Superseded by LOC.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        HINFO
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Identifies the CPU and OS used by a host.
                        Described in RFC 1035.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPSECKEY
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Provides a method for storing IPsec keying material in
                        DNS.  Described in RFC 4025.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        ISDN
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Representation of ISDN addresses.
                        Experimental.  Described in RFC 1183.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        KEY
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Stores a public key associated with a
                        DNS name.  Used in original DNSSEC; replaced
                        by DNSKEY in DNSSECbis, but still used with
                        SIG(0).  Described in RFCs 2535 and 2931.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        KX
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Identifies a key exchanger for this
                        DNS name.  Described in RFC 2230.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        LOC
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        For storing GPS info.  Described in RFC 1876.
                        Experimental.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        MX
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Identifies a mail exchange for the domain with
                        a 16-bit preference value (lower is better)
                        followed by the host name of the mail exchange.
                        Described in RFC 974, RFC 1035.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        NAPTR
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Name authority pointer.  Described in RFC 2915.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        NSAP
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        A network service access point.
                        Described in RFC 1706.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        NS
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        The authoritative name server for the
                        domain.  Described in RFC 1035.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        NSEC
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Used in DNSSECbis to securely indicate that
                        RRs with an owner name in a certain name interval do
                        not exist in
                        a zone and indicate what RR types are present for an
                        existing name.
                        Described in RFC 4034.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        NSEC3
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Used in DNSSECbis to securely indicate that
                        RRs with an owner name in a certain name
                        interval do not exist in a zone and indicate
                        what RR types are present for an existing
                        name.  NSEC3 differs from NSEC in that it
                        prevents zone enumeration but is more
                        computationally expensive on both the server
                        and the client than NSEC.  Described in RFC
                        5155.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        NSEC3PARAM
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Used in DNSSECbis to tell the authoritative
                        server which NSEC3 chains are available to use.
                        Described in RFC 5155.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        NXT
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Used in DNSSEC to securely indicate that
                        RRs with an owner name in a certain name interval do
                        not exist in
                        a zone and indicate what RR types are present for an
                        existing name.
                        Used in original DNSSEC; replaced by NSEC in
                        DNSSECbis.
                        Described in RFC 2535.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        PTR
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        A pointer to another part of the domain
                        name space.  Described in RFC 1035.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        PX
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Provides mappings between RFC 822 and X.400
                        addresses.  Described in RFC 2163.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        RP
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Information on persons responsible
                        for the domain.  Experimental.  Described in RFC 1183.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        RRSIG
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Contains DNSSECbis signature data.  Described
                        in RFC 4034.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        RT
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Route-through binding for hosts that
                        do not have their own direct wide area network
                        addresses.
                        Experimental.  Described in RFC 1183.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        SIG
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Contains DNSSEC signature data.  Used in
                        original DNSSEC; replaced by RRSIG in
                        DNSSECbis, but still used for SIG(0).
                        Described in RFCs 2535 and 2931.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        SOA
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Identifies the start of a zone of authority.
                        Described in RFC 1035.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        SPF
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Contains the Sender Policy Framework information
                        for a given email domain.  Described in RFC 4408.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        SRV
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Information about well known network
                        services (replaces WKS).  Described in RFC 2782.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        SSHFP
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Provides a way to securely publish a secure shell key's
                        fingerprint.  Described in RFC 4255.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        TXT
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Text records.  Described in RFC 1035.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        WKS
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Information about which well known
                        network services, such as SMTP, that a domain
                        supports. Historical.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        X25
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Representation of X.25 network addresses.
                        Experimental.  Described in RFC 1183.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
              The following <span class="emphasis"><em>classes</em></span> of resource records
              are currently valid in the DNS:
            </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IN
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        The Internet.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        CH
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Chaosnet, a LAN protocol created at MIT in the
                        mid-1970s.
                        Rarely used for its historical purpose, but reused for
                        BIND's
                        built-in server information zones, e.g.,
                        <code class="literal">version.bind</code>.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        HS
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Hesiod, an information service
                        developed by MIT's Project Athena. It is used to share
                        information
                        about various systems databases, such as users,
                        groups, printers
                        and so on.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
              The owner name is often implicit, rather than forming an
              integral
              part of the RR.  For example, many name servers internally form
              tree
              or hash structures for the name space, and chain RRs off nodes.
              The remaining RR parts are the fixed header (type, class, TTL)
              which is consistent for all RRs, and a variable part (RDATA)
              that
              fits the needs of the resource being described.
            </p>
<p>
              The meaning of the TTL field is a time limit on how long an
              RR can be kept in a cache.  This limit does not apply to
              authoritative
              data in zones; it is also timed out, but by the refreshing
              policies
              for the zone.  The TTL is assigned by the administrator for the
              zone where the data originates.  While short TTLs can be used to
              minimize caching, and a zero TTL prohibits caching, the
              realities
              of Internet performance suggest that these times should be on
              the
              order of days for the typical host.  If a change can be
              anticipated,
              the TTL can be reduced prior to the change to minimize
              inconsistency
              during the change, and then increased back to its former value
              following
              the change.
            </p>
<p>
              The data in the RDATA section of RRs is carried as a combination
              of binary strings and domain names.  The domain names are
              frequently
              used as "pointers" to other data in the DNS.
            </p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2591995"></a>Textual expression of RRs</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
              RRs are represented in binary form in the packets of the DNS
              protocol, and are usually represented in highly encoded form
              when
              stored in a name server or resolver.  In the examples provided
              in
              RFC 1034, a style similar to that used in master files was
              employed
              in order to show the contents of RRs.  In this format, most RRs
              are shown on a single line, although continuation lines are
              possible
              using parentheses.
            </p>
<p>
              The start of the line gives the owner of the RR.  If a line
              begins with a blank, then the owner is assumed to be the same as
              that of the previous RR.  Blank lines are often included for
              readability.
            </p>
<p>
              Following the owner, we list the TTL, type, and class of the
              RR.  Class and type use the mnemonics defined above, and TTL is
              an integer before the type field.  In order to avoid ambiguity
              in
              parsing, type and class mnemonics are disjoint, TTLs are
              integers,
              and the type mnemonic is always last. The IN class and TTL
              values
              are often omitted from examples in the interests of clarity.
            </p>
<p>
              The resource data or RDATA section of the RR are given using
              knowledge of the typical representation for the data.
            </p>
<p>
              For example, we might show the RRs carried in a message as:
            </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">ISI.EDU.</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">MX</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">10 VENERA.ISI.EDU.</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">MX</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">10 VAXA.ISI.EDU</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">VENERA.ISI.EDU</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">A</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">128.9.0.32</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">A</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">10.1.0.52</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">VAXA.ISI.EDU</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">A</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">10.2.0.27</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">A</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">128.9.0.33</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
              The MX RRs have an RDATA section which consists of a 16-bit
              number followed by a domain name.  The address RRs use a
              standard
              IP address format to contain a 32-bit internet address.
            </p>
<p>
              The above example shows six RRs, with two RRs at each of three
              domain names.
            </p>
<p>
              Similarly we might see:
            </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">XX.LCS.MIT.EDU.</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">IN A</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">10.0.0.44</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td> </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">CH A</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <code class="literal">MIT.EDU. 2420</code>
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
              This example shows two addresses for
              <code class="literal">XX.LCS.MIT.EDU</code>, each of a different class.
            </p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2592652"></a>Discussion of MX Records</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
            As described above, domain servers store information as a
            series of resource records, each of which contains a particular
            piece of information about a given domain name (which is usually,
            but not always, a host). The simplest way to think of a RR is as
            a typed pair of data, a domain name matched with a relevant datum,
            and stored with some additional type information to help systems
            determine when the RR is relevant.
          </p>
<p>
            MX records are used to control delivery of email. The data
            specified in the record is a priority and a domain name. The
            priority
            controls the order in which email delivery is attempted, with the
            lowest number first. If two priorities are the same, a server is
            chosen randomly. If no servers at a given priority are responding,
            the mail transport agent will fall back to the next largest
            priority.
            Priority numbers do not have any absolute meaning &#8212; they are
            relevant
            only respective to other MX records for that domain name. The
            domain
            name given is the machine to which the mail will be delivered.
            It <span class="emphasis"><em>must</em></span> have an associated address record
            (A or AAAA) &#8212; CNAME is not sufficient.
          </p>
<p>
            For a given domain, if there is both a CNAME record and an
            MX record, the MX record is in error, and will be ignored.
            Instead,
            the mail will be delivered to the server specified in the MX
            record
            pointed to by the CNAME.
          </p>
<p>
            For example:
          </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
<col>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">example.com.</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">IN</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">MX</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">10</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">mail.example.com.</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">IN</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">MX</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">10</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">mail2.example.com.</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">IN</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">MX</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">20</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">mail.backup.org.</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">mail.example.com.</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">IN</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">A</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">10.0.0.1</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p></p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">mail2.example.com.</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">IN</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">A</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">10.0.0.2</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p></p>
                  </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
            Mail delivery will be attempted to <code class="literal">mail.example.com</code> and
            <code class="literal">mail2.example.com</code> (in
            any order), and if neither of those succeed, delivery to <code class="literal">mail.backup.org</code> will
            be attempted.
          </p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="Setting_TTLs"></a>Setting TTLs</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
            The time-to-live of the RR field is a 32-bit integer represented
            in units of seconds, and is primarily used by resolvers when they
            cache RRs. The TTL describes how long a RR can be cached before it
            should be discarded. The following three types of TTL are
            currently
            used in a zone file.
          </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p>
                      SOA
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      The last field in the SOA is the negative
                      caching TTL. This controls how long other servers will
                      cache no-such-domain
                      (NXDOMAIN) responses from you.
                    </p>
                    <p>
                      The maximum time for
                      negative caching is 3 hours (3h).
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p>
                      $TTL
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      The $TTL directive at the top of the
                      zone file (before the SOA) gives a default TTL for every
                      RR without
                      a specific TTL set.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p>
                      RR TTLs
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Each RR can have a TTL as the second
                      field in the RR, which will control how long other
                      servers can cache
                      the it.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
            All of these TTLs default to units of seconds, though units
            can be explicitly specified, for example, <code class="literal">1h30m</code>.
          </p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2593204"></a>Inverse Mapping in IPv4</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
            Reverse name resolution (that is, translation from IP address
            to name) is achieved by means of the <span class="emphasis"><em>in-addr.arpa</em></span> domain
            and PTR records. Entries in the in-addr.arpa domain are made in
            least-to-most significant order, read left to right. This is the
            opposite order to the way IP addresses are usually written. Thus,
            a machine with an IP address of 10.1.2.3 would have a
            corresponding
            in-addr.arpa name of
            3.2.1.10.in-addr.arpa. This name should have a PTR resource record
            whose data field is the name of the machine or, optionally,
            multiple
            PTR records if the machine has more than one name. For example,
            in the [<span class="optional">example.com</span>] domain:
          </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">$ORIGIN</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">2.1.10.in-addr.arpa</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">3</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <code class="literal">IN PTR foo.example.com.</code>
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
              The <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span> lines in the examples
              are for providing context to the examples only &#8212; they do not
              necessarily
              appear in the actual usage. They are only used here to indicate
              that the example is relative to the listed origin.
            </p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2593399"></a>Other Zone File Directives</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
            The Master File Format was initially defined in RFC 1035 and
            has subsequently been extended. While the Master File Format
            itself
            is class independent all records in a Master File must be of the
            same
            class.
          </p>
<p>
            Master File Directives include <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">$INCLUDE</strong></span>,
            and <span><strong class="command">$TTL.</strong></span>
          </p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2593421"></a>The <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span> Directive</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
              Syntax: <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span>
              <em class="replaceable"><code>domain-name</code></em>
              [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>comment</code></em></span>]
            </p>
<p><span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span>
              sets the domain name that will be appended to any
              unqualified records. When a zone is first read in there
              is an implicit <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span>
              &lt;<code class="varname">zone-name</code>&gt;<span><strong class="command">.</strong></span>
              The current <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span> is appended to
              the domain specified in the <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span>
              argument if it is not absolute.
            </p>
<pre class="programlisting">
$ORIGIN example.com.
WWW     CNAME   MAIN-SERVER
</pre>
<p>
              is equivalent to
            </p>
<pre class="programlisting">
WWW.EXAMPLE.COM. CNAME MAIN-SERVER.EXAMPLE.COM.
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2593482"></a>The <span><strong class="command">$INCLUDE</strong></span> Directive</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
              Syntax: <span><strong class="command">$INCLUDE</strong></span>
              <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em>
              [<span class="optional">
<em class="replaceable"><code>origin</code></em> </span>]
              [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>comment</code></em> </span>]
            </p>
<p>
              Read and process the file <code class="filename">filename</code> as
              if it were included into the file at this point.  If <span><strong class="command">origin</strong></span> is
              specified the file is processed with <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span> set
              to that value, otherwise the current <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span> is
              used.
            </p>
<p>
              The origin and the current domain name
              revert to the values they had prior to the <span><strong class="command">$INCLUDE</strong></span> once
              the file has been read.
            </p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
                RFC 1035 specifies that the current origin should be restored
                after
                an <span><strong class="command">$INCLUDE</strong></span>, but it is silent
                on whether the current
                domain name should also be restored.  BIND 9 restores both of
                them.
                This could be construed as a deviation from RFC 1035, a
                feature, or both.
              </p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2593552"></a>The <span><strong class="command">$TTL</strong></span> Directive</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
              Syntax: <span><strong class="command">$TTL</strong></span>
              <em class="replaceable"><code>default-ttl</code></em>
              [<span class="optional">
<em class="replaceable"><code>comment</code></em> </span>]
            </p>
<p>
              Set the default Time To Live (TTL) for subsequent records
              with undefined TTLs. Valid TTLs are of the range 0-2147483647
              seconds.
            </p>
<p><span><strong class="command">$TTL</strong></span>
               is defined in RFC 2308.
            </p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2593656"></a><acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> Master File Extension: the  <span><strong class="command">$GENERATE</strong></span> Directive</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
            Syntax: <span><strong class="command">$GENERATE</strong></span>
            <em class="replaceable"><code>range</code></em>
            <em class="replaceable"><code>lhs</code></em>
            [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>ttl</code></em></span>]
            [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>]
            <em class="replaceable"><code>type</code></em>
            <em class="replaceable"><code>rhs</code></em>
            [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>comment</code></em></span>]
          </p>
<p><span><strong class="command">$GENERATE</strong></span>
            is used to create a series of resource records that only
            differ from each other by an
            iterator. <span><strong class="command">$GENERATE</strong></span> can be used to
            easily generate the sets of records required to support
            sub /24 reverse delegations described in RFC 2317:
            Classless IN-ADDR.ARPA delegation.
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">$ORIGIN 0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
$GENERATE 1-2 0 NS SERVER$.EXAMPLE.
$GENERATE 1-127 $ CNAME $.0</pre>
<p>
            is equivalent to
          </p>
<pre class="programlisting">0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. NS SERVER1.EXAMPLE.
0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. NS SERVER2.EXAMPLE.
1.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 1.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
2.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 2.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
...
127.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 127.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
</pre>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">range</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      This can be one of two forms: start-stop
                      or start-stop/step. If the first form is used, then step
                      is set to
                      1. All of start, stop and step must be positive.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">lhs</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>This
                      describes the owner name of the resource records
                      to be created.  Any single <span><strong class="command">$</strong></span>
                      (dollar sign)
                      symbols within the <span><strong class="command">lhs</strong></span> side
                      are replaced by the iterator value.

                      To get a $ in the output, you need to escape the
                      <span><strong class="command">$</strong></span> using a backslash
                      <span><strong class="command">\</strong></span>,
                      e.g. <span><strong class="command">\$</strong></span>. The
                      <span><strong class="command">$</strong></span> may optionally be followed
                      by modifiers which change the offset from the
                      iterator, field width and base.

                      Modifiers are introduced by a
                      <span><strong class="command">{</strong></span> (left brace) immediately following the
                      <span><strong class="command">$</strong></span> as
                      <span><strong class="command">${offset[,width[,base]]}</strong></span>.
                      For example, <span><strong class="command">${-20,3,d}</strong></span>
                      subtracts 20 from the current value, prints the
                      result as a decimal in a zero-padded field of
                      width 3.

                      Available output forms are decimal
                      (<span><strong class="command">d</strong></span>), octal
                      (<span><strong class="command">o</strong></span>) and hexadecimal
                      (<span><strong class="command">x</strong></span> or <span><strong class="command">X</strong></span>
                      for uppercase).  The default modifier is
                      <span><strong class="command">${0,0,d}</strong></span>.  If the
                      <span><strong class="command">lhs</strong></span> is not absolute, the
                      current <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span> is appended
                      to the name.
                    </p>
                    <p>
                      For compatibility with earlier versions, <span><strong class="command">$$</strong></span> is still
                      recognized as indicating a literal $ in the output.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">ttl</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Specifies the time-to-live of the generated records. If
                      not specified this will be inherited using the
                      normal ttl inheritance rules.
                    </p>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">class</strong></span>
                      and <span><strong class="command">ttl</strong></span> can be
                      entered in either order.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">class</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      Specifies the class of the generated records.
                      This must match the zone class if it is
                      specified.
                    </p>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">class</strong></span>
                      and <span><strong class="command">ttl</strong></span> can be
                      entered in either order.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">type</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      At present the only supported types are
                      PTR, CNAME, DNAME, A, AAAA and NS.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                    <p><span><strong class="command">rhs</strong></span></p>
                  </td>
<td>
                    <p>
                      <span><strong class="command">rhs</strong></span> is a domain name. It is processed
                      similarly to lhs.
                    </p>
                  </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
            The <span><strong class="command">$GENERATE</strong></span> directive is a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> extension
            and not part of the standard zone file format.
          </p>
<p>
            BIND 8 does not support the optional TTL and CLASS fields.
          </p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="zonefile_format"></a>Additional File Formats</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
            In addition to the standard textual format, BIND 9
            supports the ability to read or dump to zone files in
            other formats.  The <code class="constant">raw</code> format is
            currently available as an additional format.  It is a
            binary format representing BIND 9's internal data
            structure directly, thereby remarkably improving the
            loading time.
          </p>
<p>
            For a primary server, a zone file in the
            <code class="constant">raw</code> format is expected to be
            generated from a textual zone file by the
            <span><strong class="command">named-compilezone</strong></span> command.  For a
            secondary server or for a dynamic zone, it is automatically
            generated (if this format is specified by the
            <span><strong class="command">masterfile-format</strong></span> option) when
            <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> dumps the zone contents after
            zone transfer or when applying prior updates.
          </p>
<p>
            If a zone file in a binary format needs manual modification,
            it first must be converted to a textual form by the
            <span><strong class="command">named-compilezone</strong></span> command.  All
            necessary modification should go to the text file, which
            should then be converted to the binary form by the
            <span><strong class="command">named-compilezone</strong></span> command again.
          </p>
<p>
             Although the <code class="constant">raw</code> format uses the
             network byte order and avoids architecture-dependent
             data alignment so that it is as much portable as
             possible, it is primarily expected to be used inside
             the same single system.  In order to export a zone
             file in the <code class="constant">raw</code> format or make a
             portable backup of the file, it is recommended to
             convert the file to the standard textual representation.
          </p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
<a name="statistics"></a>BIND9 Statistics</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
          <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 maintains lots of statistics
          information and provides several interfaces for users to
          get access to the statistics.
          The available statistics include all statistics counters
          that were available in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 and
          are meaningful in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9,
          and other information that is considered useful.
        </p>
<p>
          The statistics information is categorized into the following
          sections.
        </p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                  <p>Incoming Requests</p>
                </td>
<td>
                  <p>
                    The number of incoming DNS requests for each OPCODE.
                  </p>
                </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                  <p>Incoming Queries</p>
                </td>
<td>
                  <p>
                    The number of incoming queries for each RR type.
                  </p>
                </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                  <p>Outgoing Queries</p>
                </td>
<td>
                  <p>
                    The number of outgoing queries for each RR
                    type sent from the internal resolver.
                    Maintained per view.
                  </p>
                </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                  <p>Name Server Statistics</p>
                </td>
<td>
                  <p>
                    Statistics counters about incoming request processing.
                  </p>
                </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                  <p>Zone Maintenance Statistics</p>
                </td>
<td>
                  <p>
                    Statistics counters regarding zone maintenance
                    operations such as zone transfers.
                  </p>
                </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                  <p>Resolver Statistics</p>
                </td>
<td>
                  <p>
                    Statistics counters about name resolution
                    performed in the internal resolver.
                    Maintained per view.
                  </p>
                </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                  <p>Cache DB RRsets</p>
                </td>
<td>
                  <p>
                    The number of RRsets per RR type (positive
                    or negative) and nonexistent names stored in the
                    cache database.
                    Maintained per view.
                  </p>
                </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
          A subset of Name Server Statistics is collected and shown
          per zone for which the server has the authority when
          <span><strong class="command">zone-statistics</strong></span> is set to
          <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>.
          These statistics counters are shown with their zone and view
          names.
          In some cases the view names are omitted for the default view.
        </p>
<p>
          There are currently two user interfaces to get access to the
          statistics.
          One is in the plain text format dumped to the file specified
          by the <span><strong class="command">statistics-file</strong></span> configuration option.
          The other is remotely accessible via a statistics channel
          when the <span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> statement
          is specified in the configuration file
          (see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#statschannels" title="statistics-channels Statement Grammar">the section called &#8220;<span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> Statement Grammar&#8221;</a>.)
        </p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="statsfile"></a>The Statistics File</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
            The text format statistics dump begins with a line, like:
          </p>
<p>
            <span><strong class="command">+++ Statistics Dump +++ (973798949)</strong></span>
          </p>
<p>
            The number in parentheses is a standard
            Unix-style timestamp, measured as seconds since January 1, 1970.

            Following
            that line is a set of statistics information, which is categorized
            as described above.
            Each section begins with a line, like:
          </p>
<p>
            <span><strong class="command">++ Name Server Statistics ++</strong></span>
          </p>
<p>
            Each section consists of lines, each containing the statistics
            counter value followed by its textual description.
            See below for available counters.
            For brevity, counters that have a value of 0 are not shown
            in the statistics file.
          </p>
<p>
            The statistics dump ends with the line where the
            number is identical to the number in the beginning line; for example:
          </p>
<p>
            <span><strong class="command">--- Statistics Dump --- (973798949)</strong></span>
          </p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="statistics_counters"></a>Statistics Counters</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
            The following tables summarize statistics counters that
            <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 provides.
            For each row of the tables, the leftmost column is the
            abbreviated symbol name of that counter.
            These symbols are shown in the statistics information
            accessed via an HTTP statistics channel.
            The rightmost column gives the description of the counter,
            which is also shown in the statistics file
            (but, in this document, possibly with slight modification
            for better readability).
            Additional notes may also be provided in this column.
            When a middle column exists between these two columns,
            it gives the corresponding counter name of the
            <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 statistics, if applicable.
          </p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2594562"></a>Name Server Statistics Counters</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <span class="emphasis"><em>Symbol</em></span>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <span class="emphasis"><em>BIND8 Symbol</em></span>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <span class="emphasis"><em>Description</em></span>
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">Requestv4</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RQ</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv4 requests received.
                        Note: this also counts non query requests.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">Requestv6</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RQ</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv6 requests received.
                        Note: this also counts non query requests.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">ReqEdns0</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Requests with EDNS(0) received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">ReqBadEDNSVer</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Requests with unsupported EDNS version received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">ReqTSIG</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Requests with TSIG received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">ReqSIG0</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Requests with SIG(0) received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">ReqBadSIG</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Requests with invalid (TSIG or SIG(0)) signature.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">ReqTCP</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RTCP</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        TCP requests received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">AuthQryRej</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RUQ</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Authoritative (non recursive) queries rejected.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RecQryRej</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RURQ</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Recursive queries rejected.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">XfrRej</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RUXFR</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Zone transfer requests rejected.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">UpdateRej</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RUUpd</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Dynamic update requests rejected.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">Response</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">SAns</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Responses sent.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RespTruncated</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Truncated responses sent.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RespEDNS0</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Responses with EDNS(0) sent.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RespTSIG</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Responses with TSIG sent.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RespSIG0</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Responses with SIG(0) sent.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">QrySuccess</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Queries resulted in a successful answer.
                        This means the query which returns a NOERROR response
                        with at least one answer RR.
                        This corresponds to the
                        <span><strong class="command">success</strong></span> counter
                        of previous versions of
                        <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">QryAuthAns</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Queries resulted in authoritative answer.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">QryNoauthAns</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">SNaAns</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Queries resulted in non authoritative answer.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">QryReferral</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Queries resulted in referral answer.
                        This corresponds to the
                        <span><strong class="command">referral</strong></span> counter
                        of previous versions of
                        <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">QryNxrrset</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Queries resulted in NOERROR responses with no data.
                        This corresponds to the
                        <span><strong class="command">nxrrset</strong></span> counter
                        of previous versions of
                        <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">QrySERVFAIL</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">SFail</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Queries resulted in SERVFAIL.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">QryFORMERR</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">SFErr</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Queries resulted in FORMERR.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">QryNXDOMAIN</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">SNXD</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Queries resulted in NXDOMAIN.
                        This corresponds to the
                        <span><strong class="command">nxdomain</strong></span> counter
                        of previous versions of
                        <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">QryRecursion</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RFwdQ</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Queries which caused the server
                        to perform recursion in order to find the final answer.
                        This corresponds to the
                        <span><strong class="command">recursion</strong></span> counter
                        of previous versions of
                        <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">QryDuplicate</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RDupQ</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Queries which the server attempted to
                        recurse but discovered an existing query with the same
                        IP address, port, query ID, name, type and class
                        already being processed.
                        This corresponds to the
                        <span><strong class="command">duplicate</strong></span> counter
                        of previous versions of
                        <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">QryDropped</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Queries for which the server
                        discovered an excessive number of existing
                        recursive queries for the same name, type and
                        class and were subsequently dropped.
                        This corresponds to the
                        <span><strong class="command">dropped</strong></span> counter
                        of previous versions of
                        <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">QryFailure</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Other query failures.
                        This corresponds to the
                        <span><strong class="command">failure</strong></span> counter
                        of previous versions of
                        <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">XfrReqDone</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Requested zone transfers completed.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">UpdateReqFwd</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Update requests forwarded.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">UpdateRespFwd</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Update responses forwarded.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">UpdateFwdFail</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Dynamic update forward failed.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">UpdateDone</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Dynamic updates completed.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">UpdateFail</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Dynamic updates failed.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">UpdateBadPrereq</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Dynamic updates rejected due to prerequisite failure.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2596153"></a>Zone Maintenance Statistics Counters</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <span class="emphasis"><em>Symbol</em></span>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <span class="emphasis"><em>Description</em></span>
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">NotifyOutv4</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv4 notifies sent.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">NotifyOutv6</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv6 notifies sent.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">NotifyInv4</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv4 notifies received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">NotifyInv6</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv6 notifies received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">NotifyRej</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Incoming notifies rejected.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">SOAOutv4</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv4 SOA queries sent.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">SOAOutv6</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv6 SOA queries sent.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">AXFRReqv4</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv4 AXFR requested.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">AXFRReqv6</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv6 AXFR requested.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">IXFRReqv4</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv4 IXFR requested.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">IXFRReqv6</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv6 IXFR requested.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">XfrSuccess</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Zone transfer requests succeeded.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">XfrFail</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Zone transfer requests failed.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2596604"></a>Resolver Statistics Counters</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <span class="emphasis"><em>Symbol</em></span>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <span class="emphasis"><em>BIND8 Symbol</em></span>
                      </p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        <span class="emphasis"><em>Description</em></span>
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">Queryv4</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">SFwdQ</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv4 queries sent.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">Queryv6</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">SFwdQ</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv6 queries sent.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">Responsev4</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RR</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv4 responses received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">Responsev6</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RR</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv6 responses received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">NXDOMAIN</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RNXD</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        NXDOMAIN received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">SERVFAIL</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RFail</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        SERVFAIL received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">FORMERR</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RFErr</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        FORMERR received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">OtherError</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RErr</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Other errors received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">EDNS0Fail</strong></span></p>
                                                 </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        EDNS(0) query failures.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">Mismatch</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RDupR</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Mismatch responses received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">Truncated</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Truncated responses received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">Lame</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">RLame</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Lame delegations received.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">Retry</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">SDupQ</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        Query retries performed.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">GlueFetchv4</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">SSysQ</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv4 NS address fetches invoked.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">GlueFetchv6</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">SSysQ</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv6 NS address fetches invoked.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">GlueFetchv4Fail</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv4 NS address fetch failed.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">GlueFetchv6Fail</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        IPv6 NS address fetch failed.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">ValAttempt</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        DNSSEC validation attempted.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">ValOk</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        DNSSEC validation succeeded.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">ValNegOk</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        DNSSEC validation on negative information succeeded.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command">ValFail</strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
                    </td>
<td>
                      <p>
                        DNSSEC validation failed.
                      </p>
                    </td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2597389"></a>Compatibility with <span class="emphasis"><em>BIND</em></span> 8 Counters</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
              Most statistics counters that were available
              in <span><strong class="command">BIND</strong></span> 8 are also supported in
              <span><strong class="command">BIND</strong></span> 9 as shown in the above tables.
              Here are notes about other counters that do not appear
              in these tables.
            </p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">RFwdR,SFwdR</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    These counters are not supported
                    because <span><strong class="command">BIND</strong></span> 9 does not adopt
                    the notion of <span class="emphasis"><em>forwarding</em></span>
                    as <span><strong class="command">BIND</strong></span> 8 did.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">RAXFR</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    This counter is accessible in the Incoming Queries section.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">RIQ</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    This counter is accessible in the Incoming Requests section.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">ROpts</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    This counter is not supported
                    because <span><strong class="command">BIND</strong></span> 9 does not care
                    about IP options in the first place.
                  </p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">SErr</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
                    This counter could be implemented, but is not yet
                    supported.
                  </p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="navfooter">
<hr>
<table width="100%" summary="Navigation footer">
<tr>
<td width="40%" align="left">
<a accesskey="p" href="Bv9ARM.ch05.html">Prev</a> </td>
<td width="20%" align="center"> </td>
<td width="40%" align="right"> <a accesskey="n" href="Bv9ARM.ch07.html">Next</a>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="40%" align="left" valign="top">Chapter 5. The <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 Lightweight Resolver </td>
<td width="20%" align="center"><a accesskey="h" href="Bv9ARM.html">Home</a></td>
<td width="40%" align="right" valign="top"> Chapter 7. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 Security Considerations</td>
</tr>
</table>
</div>
</body>
</html>